JP5735249B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention includes a plurality of tables radical 113, relates to a gaming machine that performs the variable display in the variable display means for a plurality of line is formed by the identification information derived displayed on each display unit.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display means having a plurality of display units capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) is provided, and when the combination information display result of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means Is configured to give the player the gaming value of the game.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of identification information that is started in the variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening, A “big hit” occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, when the identification information (design) of the display unit having the variable display means is stopped and displayed, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the identification information (design) of the display unit to be stopped and displayed next is displayed. Some are configured to execute (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, when the left decorative design is stopped and displayed, by performing an effect in such a manner that a character in the display region of the left decorative design beckons, An effect in which an ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area is noticed, and when the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a character in the right decorative symbol display area is invited. It is described that an effect of notifying the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display region of the decorative symbol is performed by executing.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, when the left and right symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and are in a reach state, numbers that are reminiscent of the middle stopped symbol are displayed. It describes that an effect of notifying the stop symbol is executed. In addition, it is described that an effect of changing the number once displayed to a different number every time the number is displayed with a towel or the like is performed.

JP2009-066115 (paragraphs 0361-0366, FIGS. 68-70) JP 2002-239158 (paragraphs 0106-0115, FIG. 6-9)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 or Patent Document 2, the identification information of the display unit to be stopped and displayed next is notified at the timing when the identification information (design) of any display unit of the variable display means is stopped. Thus, the player's attention can be given to the generation timing of the advance notice and the stop timing of the identification information (symbol), and the interest of the game can be improved. However, once a notice is generated, until the identification information on the display unit subject to notice is stopped and displayed, it is not possible to attract any interest in the production, and it is possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game It ’s not that hard.

Accordingly, the present invention is, from the start of the notice of the identification information derived displayed, even in the period until the identification information is derived displayed in the display unit of the notice subject to draw attention of the player in the effect An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

(Unit 1) the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality the tables radical 113 (e.g., display section of the upper U1, middle U2 and lower U3 shown in FIG. 37) has a plurality of identification information derived displayed on the display unit line (e.g., left column L1, middle row L2, right column L3, lower right L4 from the upper left, and five pay lines from lower left upper right L5 shown in FIG. 37) of the variable display means are formed (e.g., effect A gaming machine that performs variable display in the display device 9) , and among the plurality of display units in the variable display means, identification information derived and displayed on a predetermined display unit is derived to the predetermined display unit. A notice effect execution means for giving a notice before it is displayed (for example, process data selected or switched in accordance with the stop symbol notice pattern in steps S8004 and S8111 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Therefore, the notice effect executing means includes a first image (for example, upper symbol display area) in the first display portion (for example, the upper display portion) among the plurality of display portions. First notice means for displaying the identification information derived and displayed on the first display unit by displaying the displayed graphic image (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105). as shown in FIG. 64 (2) and 65 (2), the image and the cause) More of symbols in the upper left symbol display area of the second image Te display position smell of the first image (e.g., bottom left or bottom right The symbol image that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area) is then displayed, and the second image is moved from the display position to a second display unit (for example, the lower display unit) different from the first display unit. Second notice means for notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the second display section (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105, as shown in FIGS. 64 (2) and (3). The symbols displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left are split and moved to the symbol display area in the lower left to generate a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the symbols displayed in the upper left symbol display area are divided and moved to the lower right symbol display area, and a stop symbol notice effect is generated in the lower right symbol display area. ) As shown in (3), the symbol displayed in the upper left symbol display area is divided and moved to the middle right symbol display area, and the stop symbol in the middle right symbol display area is displayed. Generate a notice effect. Also, as shown in FIGS. 65 (2) and 65 (5), the symbol displayed in the upper left symbol display area is divided and moved to the middle lower symbol display area, and the stop symbol notice in the lower middle symbol display area is displayed. Produce a production. ) And includes a second notifying means, depending on whether to move the second image on any line in the second display portion, the display state of the variable display means for warning that a different display state (For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 generates a stop symbol notice effect in the lower left symbol display area as shown in FIGS. 64 (2) and (3) by executing step S8105, It is in a state of notifying that the single reach state in the winning line in the left column L1 will be in. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (2) and (5), a stop symbol notice effect is generated in the lower right symbol display area. In such a case, a state is announced in which a double reach state is entered in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 and from the lower left to the upper right L5, as shown in FIGS. When the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the symbol display area in the middle right, a state of notifying that it becomes a weak chance eye symbol is entered, and as shown in FIGS. (When the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the lower symbol display area, it is in a state of notifying that it will be a strong chance symbol.) With such an arrangement, notice from the start of the identification information derived displayed, even in the period until the identification information is derived displayed in the display unit of the notice target, is possible to draw attention of the player in the effect Can improve the interest of the game. Further, since it is predicted that the display state of the variable display means will be different depending on the destination of the second image, the player can be drawn to the destination of the image, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.
Moreover, you may be comprised so that the aspect determination means which determines the aspect which moves a 2nd image to a 2nd display part may be provided.
In addition, the notice effect executing means displays the second image at least on the second display unit without accompanying the movement of the second image, thereby notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit. The notification means may be included.

In (unit 2) means 1, a game machine, reach to the single-line reach state by a reach state that constitutes a part of a specific display results of Symbols that are derived displayed in one line effect (e.g., reach demonstration as a single reach state) reach demonstration to a plurality of lines reach state by respectively reach state combines the identification information being derived displayed in a plurality of line (e.g., double reach state The reach production executing means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the step S8105 according to the process data selected in the step S8004, thereby reaching the single reach state or the double reach state). Execute variation display of production symbols including production Comprising a that), the second notifying means, depending on whether to move the second image on any line in the second display portion, the display state is the single-line reach state or a plurality of lines reach state of the variable display means (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 generates a stop symbol announcement effect in the symbol display area in the lower left as shown in FIGS. 64 (2) and (3) by executing step S8105). In such a case, it is in a state of notifying that the single reach state in the winning line in the left column L1 is reached, and as shown in FIGS. When the notice effect is generated, it is in a state of notifying the double reach state in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 and from the lower left to the upper right L5.) It may be composed of sea urchin. According to such a configuration, a single line reach state or a multi-line reach state is predicted according to the destination of the second image, so that the player's attention is also drawn to the destination of the image. Can improve the interest of the game.

In (unit 3) means 1 or means 2, the gaming machine, the first effect of Symbols displayed in line is the first special display results (e.g., effect of stopping displaying a weak chance th symbol ) And a second effect (for example, an effect of stopping and displaying a strong chance eye symbol) that is a second special display result different from the first special display result (for example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 executes step S8105 in accordance with the process data selected in step S8004, thereby executing a variation display of the effect symbol in which the weak chance symbol or the strong chance symbol is temporarily displayed as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol. ) And a place where a predetermined game value is given at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed when the second effect is executed. Game state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the steps S305 to S307 to control the game state (for example, the big hit game state) to control the big hit game state, and the effect control computer 100 in step S8004. comprising a, a portion) to determine the strength chance th symbol at a high rate in the case of a big hit with a pseudo continuous chance th determination table shown in FIG. 40, the second warning means is one in the second display portion la Depending on whether the second image is moved on the in-line, the display state of the variable display means is notified in advance that the first special display result or the second special display result (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 has By executing step S8105, as shown in FIGS. 65 (2) and 65 (3), stop in the symbol display area in the middle right When the pattern notice effect is generated, a state of notifying that the symbol becomes a weak chance eye will be informed, and as shown in FIGS. When an effect is generated, it may be in a state of notifying that it will be a strong chance symbol.) According to such a configuration, since it is predicted that the first special display result or the second special display result will be obtained according to the destination of the second image, the player's attention is also given to the destination of the image. It can be drawn and the interest in games can be improved.

In any of (unit 4) means one of the means 3, first warning means, a first line on the first display unit (e.g., the upper left pattern display area) the first image (e.g., the upper left of by displaying an image) of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display area, as well as notice identification information derived displayed on the first line in the first display unit, first in the first display unit 1 on different second line is a line (e.g., upper right pattern display area) third image (e.g., image of the symbols displayed stopped in the upper right symbol display area) by displaying a said foretold identification information derived displayed on the second line (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100, pairs stop symbol warning pattern 10,30,31,106,116,117 determined in step S8003 The process table is selected in step S8004 and step S8105 is executed.) The second notice means causes the second image to appear at the display position of the first image, and then moves the second image from the display position. as well as a possible announcement identification information derived displayed on Lula in put on the display unit of the target by, after newly caused to appear a fourth image in the display position of the third image, the from the display position 4 image is capable notice identification information derived displayed on Lula in put on the display unit of the target by moving (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100 is stopped at step S8003 symbol notice patterns 10, 30 , 106, 116 are executed, step S8105 is executed, and an effect of dividing the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper left is executed. On the other hand, if the stop symbol advance notice patterns 31 and 117 are determined in step S8003, step S8105 is executed to execute an effect of dividing the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper right). The display state of the variable display means is different depending on whether the second image appears at the image display position or the fourth image appears at the third image display position. (For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105, the stop design warning pattern 31 shown in FIG. 46 and the stop symbol warning pattern 117 shown in FIG. 52 result in double reach. Only the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper right may be split). According to such a configuration, it is predicted that the display state of the variable display means will be different depending on whether the second image appears or the fourth image appears. The player's attention can be drawn and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 5) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display unit (for example, each of the nine symbol displays shown in FIG. 66) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, effect symbols) that can each be identified. has a plurality of areas), a plurality of line by the identification information derived displayed on the display unit (e.g., left column L1, middle row L2 shown in FIG. 66, right column L3, upper L4, middle L5, lower L6, lower right L7 from the upper left, and the variable display means eight pay lines in the upper right L8) is formed from the lower left (e.g., includes the effect display device 9), derived displayed in any of the line of the variable display means A gaming machine that has a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when a combination of identification information results in a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). Duplicate Among the display units, the notice effect execution means for notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the predetermined display unit before the identification information is derived and displayed on the predetermined display unit (for example, in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Step S8004 is a part that executes the same process as Step S8105 according to the process data selected or switched according to the stop symbol notice pattern in the same process as Step S8004, and the notice effect execution means includes a plurality of display units. By displaying a first image (for example, an image of a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area) on the first display unit (for example, the upper left symbol display area), it is derived and displayed on the first display unit. First notice means for notifying the identification information (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the same processing as in step S8105. As shown in FIG. 66 (2), a symbol image is displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left, and a second image (for example, left middle or middle upper) is displayed at the first image display position. After the symbol image (stopped and displayed in the symbol display area) appears, the second image from the display position is displayed on a second display unit different from the first display unit (for example, the symbol display area in the middle left or middle). Second notice means that notices the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by moving it (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the same process as step S8105, thereby performing the process shown in FIG. 66 (2)). As shown in (3), the symbol displayed in the upper left symbol display area is divided and moved to the middle left symbol display area, and a stop symbol notice effect is generated in the middle left symbol display area. 66 (2) and (5), the symbols displayed in the upper left symbol display area are divided and moved to the upper upper symbol display area, and the stop symbol notice effect in the upper upper symbol display area is obtained. Is generated. ), And the second notice means has a display state in which the display state of the variable display means is different depending on which display unit is different from the first display unit as the second display unit. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a process similar to that in step S8105 to stop in the symbol display area in the middle left as shown in FIGS. 66 (2) and (3)). When the symbol notice effect is generated, it is in a state of notifying that it becomes a weak chance eye symbol, and, as shown in FIGS. When an effect is generated, it will be in a state of notifying that it will become a strong chance symbol design, or in which symbol display area a stop symbol notification effect has been generated, or a newly generated stop symbol Depending on the number of tell effect, single reach state, a state in which they notice that a double reach state or triple reach state.) It is characterized. With such an arrangement, notice from the start of the identification information derived displayed, even in the period until the identification information is derived displayed in the display unit of the notice target, is possible to draw attention of the player in the effect Can improve the interest of the game. Further, since it is predicted that the display state of the variable display means will be different depending on the destination of the second image, the player can be drawn to the destination of the image, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

In (unit 6) means 5, the gaming machine may reach to the single-line reach state by a reach state that constitutes a part of a specific display results of Symbols that are derived displayed in one line effect (e.g., reach demonstration as a single reach state) reach demonstration to a plurality of lines reach state by respectively reach state combines the identification information being derived displayed in a plurality of line (e.g., double reach state And the reach effect execution means for executing the reach effect in the triple reach state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the process similar to step S8105 according to the process data selected in the process similar to step S8004). Depending on the single reach state, double reach state or The second notice means moves the second image as a second display unit that is different from the first display unit. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display means is notified in advance that the display state becomes the single line reach state or the multiple line reach state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the same process as step S8105, Depending on the stop symbol notice effect in which symbol display area has been generated or the number of newly generated stop symbol notice effects, it will be in a state of notifying that it will be in the single reach state, double reach state or triple reach state. .) May be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, a single line reach state or a multi-line reach state is predicted according to the destination of the second image, so that the player's attention is also drawn to the destination of the image. Can improve the interest of the game.

In (unit 7) means 5 or means 6, gaming machine, the first effect a combination of identification information displayed in the line is the first special display results (e.g., effect of stopping displaying a weak chance th symbol ) And a second effect (for example, an effect of stopping and displaying a strong chance eye symbol) that is a second special display result different from the first special display result (for example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 executes a process similar to that in step S8105 according to the process data selected in the process similar to that in step S8004, thereby temporarily stopping and displaying a weak chance symbol or a strong chance symbol as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol. When the second effect is executed, a higher rate is obtained compared to the case where the first effect is executed. Game state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes processing similar to steps S305 to S307 to control to the big hit game state, which controls to a predetermined game state (for example, big hit game state) that gives the game value of In the case where the effect control computer 100 is a big hit using the pseudo-continuous chance eye determination table shown in FIG. 40 by the same processing as in step S8004, a portion that determines a strong chance eye symbol at a high rate). The second notice means determines whether the display state of the variable display means is the first special display result or the first display, depending on which display part is different from the first display part as the second display part. 2 (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105 to As shown in 66 (2) and (3), when a stop symbol notice effect is generated in the symbol display area in the middle left, it is in a state of notifying that it will be a weak chance symbol symbol. 2) As shown in (5), when the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the upper symbol display area, the player is in a state of notifying that the symbol will become a strong chance symbol. According to such a configuration, since it is predicted that the first special display result or the second special display result will be obtained according to the destination of the second image, the player is also notified of the destination of the image. Attention can be drawn, and interest in games can be improved.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 5 to 7, the first notice means displays the first image (in the upper left symbol display area shown in FIG. 66) on the first display part (for example, the upper left symbol display area shown in FIG. 66). For example, by displaying a symbol image that is stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area), the identification information derived and displayed on the first display unit is notified in advance, and the first display unit and the second display unit are By displaying a third image (for example, an image of a symbol stopped and displayed in the upper right symbol display area) on a different third display portion (for example, the upper right symbol display area shown in FIG. 66), the third display portion (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 corresponds to the stop symbol notice pattern 10, 30, 31, 106, 116, 117 determined by the same process as step S8003). The process table is selected in the same process as in step S8004 and the same process as in step S8105 is performed), and the second notice unit newly causes the second image to appear at the display position of the first image, and then The second image is moved from the display position to the second display unit, and the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit can be notified in advance, and a new fourth image appears at the display position of the third image. After that, the fourth image can be moved from the display position to a fourth display unit different from the first display unit, the second display unit, and the third display unit, and the identification information derived and displayed on the fourth display unit can be notified in advance. (For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol notice pattern 10, 30, 106, 116 by the same process as step S8003, step S8105 is performed. The same process is executed to produce an effect that splits the same symbol as the upper left symbol display area, whereas if the stop symbol advance notice patterns 31 and 117 are determined by the same process as step S8003, the step is executed. The same processing as in S8105 is executed to produce an effect of splitting the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper right.), A second image newly appears at the display position of the first image, or third Depending on whether or not the fourth image appears at the display position of the image, the display state of the variable display means is notified in advance (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 is similar to step S8105). By executing the process, the stop symbol notice pattern 31 shown in FIG. 46 and the stop symbol notice pattern 117 shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper right may be split only when it becomes a leech. According to such a configuration, it is predicted that the display state of the variable display means will be different depending on whether the second image appears or the fourth image appears. The player's attention can be drawn and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the second notice means has identification information different from the identification information derived and displayed on the first display section notified by the first notice means on the second display section. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 can display the stop symbol notification patterns 41, 42, 44, 45, 61, 62, 64, 65, 141, 142, 151 in step S1526.) , 152, 161, 162, 171, 172, and executing step S 8105 using the process data corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern, thereby stopping at least a part of the random chance symbol “135” In step S1534, stop symbol notification patterns 81, 82, 91, 92 are determined, and the determined stop is determined. By executing the steps S8105 using the process data in accordance with the pattern notice pattern and notice that the at least a portion of the stop symbols of the pseudo communication opportunities th symbol.) May also be configured so. According to such a configuration, the possibility of becoming a combination of identification information other than the specific display result (for example, a chance symbol) can be notified in advance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, the gaming machine uses a predetermined combination of identification information derived and displayed on each display unit of the variable display means (for example, a normal big hit symbol, a probable big hit symbol) Predetermining means (for example, steps S61, S62, S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to use a chance of winning chance symbol or a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol before the derivation display of the combination of identification information S92), and the notice effect executing means has the second image on the second display unit at the same timing as the first notice means starts the notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the first display unit. Is displayed at the same time notice means for starting the notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the second display section (for example, an effect control microphone). The computer 100 determines stop symbol notice patterns 12, 33, 51, 71, 107, 118, 146 and 156 in step S1526, and executes step S8105 using process data corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern. The stop symbol advancement effect in the upper left symbol display area is started, and the stop symbol advancement effect is started in the lower left or lower right symbol display area at the same timing). The identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the second notification unit and the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the same timing notification unit at different ratios depending on whether or not they are determined. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the step. In 1526, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the stop symbol notice patterns 1-11, 21 in which the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is relatively executed. To 32 are assigned more judgment values than the stop symbol advance notice patterns 12 and 33 in which the stop symbol advance notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed (for example, in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 12 is assigned). , 33 is determined) using the stop symbol advance pattern determination table, the stop symbol advance pattern is determined, on the other hand, for example, as shown in FIGS. In some cases, a certain number of determination values are also allocated to the stop symbol notice patterns 107 and 118 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed (example) For example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, 30 determination values are assigned to the stop symbol notification patterns 107 and 118). The stop symbol notification pattern is determined using the stop symbol notification pattern determination table. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the second notification unit is executed, and the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the same timing notification unit is displayed. It is possible to change the expectation for a predetermined combination between the case where the notice is executed and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 1 to 10, the gaming machine uses a predetermined combination of identification information combinations derived and displayed on each display unit of the variable display means (for example, a normal jackpot symbol, a probability variation jackpot symbol). Predetermining means (for example, steps S61, S62, S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to use a chance of winning chance symbol or a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol before the derivation display of the combination of identification information The portion for executing S92), and the notice effect executing means newly displays a third image (for example, an image of a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle or middle symbol display area) at the display position of the first image. Then, the third image is moved from the display position to a third display unit (for example, the left middle or middle symbol display area) different from the first display unit and the second display unit. The third notice means for giving notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the third display section (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 is displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left by executing step S8105. Whether or not it has been determined to be a predetermined combination by a predetermining means, including splitting the symbol and moving it to the middle symbol display area to generate a stop symbol notice effect in the middle left and middle symbol display areas) The notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the second notice means and the notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the third display part by the third notice means are executed at different rates depending on ( For example, in step S1526, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the middle left and middle symbols, for example, as shown in FIGS. Compared to the stop symbol notice patterns 1 and 21, which are the stop symbol notice effects in the lower left and lower right symbol display areas, compared to the stop symbol notice patterns 4 and 24 which are the stop symbol notice effects in the indicated area. The stop symbol notification pattern is determined using the stop symbol notification pattern determination table to which the value is assigned, and also, for example, as shown in FIGS. Stops to which more judgment values are assigned compared to the stop symbol advance notice patterns 41 and 61 that are stop symbol advance notice effects in the lower left and lower right symbol display areas with respect to the stop symbol advance notice patterns 44 and 64 that become the effect. The stop symbol notice pattern is determined using the symbol notice pattern determination table.). According to such a configuration, the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the second notice unit is executed, and the identification information derived and displayed on the third display unit by the third notice unit is displayed. It is possible to change the expectation for a predetermined combination between the case where the notice is executed and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 1 to 11, the gaming machine sets a predetermined combination of identification information derived and displayed on each display unit of the variable display means (for example, a normal jackpot symbol, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) Predetermining means (for example, steps S61, S62, S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to use a chance of winning chance symbol or a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol before the derivation display of the combination of identification information S92 is executed, and the notice effect executing means is newly stopped and displayed in a plurality of images (for example, left middle and lower left or both middle and lower right symbol display areas at the display position of the first image). A plurality of images from the display position (for example, left middle and lower left) Or a plurality of notice means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105) for moving to the middle, middle, and lower right symbol display areas and notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the plurality of display sections. To split the symbol displayed in the upper left symbol display area into two, and move it to the left middle and lower left or middle middle and lower right symbol display areas, and the left middle and lower left or middle middle and lower right. Display symbol display effect in the symbol display area), and the derivation display on the second display unit by the second notice unit at a different rate depending on whether or not the predetermined combination is determined by the pre-determining unit The identification information to be displayed and the identification information to be derived and displayed on the plurality of display units by the plurality of notification means (for example, For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the outgoing control microcomputer 100 splits the same two symbols from the already-executed stop symbol notice effect only when a normal big hit or a probable big hit, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, for example. By using the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table provided with stop symbol advance notice patterns 11 and 32 for generating stop symbol advance notice effects in the left middle and lower left or middle middle and lower right symbol display areas respectively, 47 and 48, the symbols “3” and “5” are split only from the stop symbol notice effect that is already being executed, only when suddenly probable big hit or small hit. Stops that generate stop symbol notice effects in the left and middle left and middle middle and lower right symbol display areas, respectively. The stop symbol advance notice pattern is determined using the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table provided with the stop symbol advance notice patterns 50 and 70. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, the notification of the identification information derived and displayed on the second display unit by the second notification unit is executed and the notification of the identification information derived and displayed on the plurality of display units by the plurality of notification unit. When the game is executed, the expectation for the predetermined combination can be made different, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the arrangement | sequence of the effect symbol variably displayed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning line formed on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a quasi-continuous chance eye symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pseudo | simulation continuous chance eye determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a stop symbol notification pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a stop symbol notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a stop symbol notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in the case of performing a stop symbol notification effect in the game machine provided with the several winning line.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. Specifically, in this embodiment, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, display portions capable of displaying the change of the effect symbol while simultaneously scrolling in the horizontal direction are formed in the upper, middle, and lower stages, respectively. In the upper, middle, and lower display units, areas in which the stop symbol of the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed are formed on the left, middle, and right, respectively, with the stop symbol of the effect symbol being stopped. However, in this embodiment, an area in which those stop symbols can be stopped and displayed is called a symbol display area. In this embodiment, for example, the left, middle, and right symbol display areas in the upper display section are respectively represented as an upper left symbol display area, a middle upper symbol display area, and an upper right symbol display area. That's it. Further, for example, the left, middle, and right symbol display areas in the middle display section are referred to as the left middle symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right middle symbol display area, respectively. Further, for example, the left, middle and right symbol display areas in the lower display section are referred to as a lower left symbol display area, a middle lower symbol display area and a lower right symbol display area, respectively.

  In this embodiment, the display parts capable of changing the display of the effect symbols as described above are formed in the upper, middle, and lower stages, and are displayed in a variable manner in the horizontal direction, in addition to the left, middle, and right columns. Thus, a total of five winning lines from the upper left to the lower right and the lower left to the upper right (display lines on which the jackpot symbols displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 can be derived and displayed) are formed.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but if a plurality of winning lines are formed, for example, Display units capable of displaying a plurality of effect symbols on the display screen of the display device 9 may be formed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the effect symbols may be displayed in a vertical direction. In this case, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, in addition to the upper stage, middle stage and lower stage, a total of five pay lines from upper left to lower right and lower left to upper right are formed.

  Further, for example, nine effect symbols can be displayed simultaneously on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and each effect symbol is variably displayed in each symbol display area (in this case, each symbol display area In addition to the upper, middle, lower, left, middle, and right columns, a total of 8 from the upper left to the lower right and the lower left to the upper right, respectively. Two pay lines may be formed.

  The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If control is possible, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In this case, a display color reminiscent of a big hit in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from a loss is displayed. The display color may be different depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a promising jackpot or a regular jackpot), and a jackpot that can be expected to win a game ball at the jackpot ( For example, the display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). The display colors when the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off may be assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off to prevent them from becoming invisible. Scene image different display color (e.g., black) it is desirable that.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags that are selectively processed according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is a reach state in which the effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 9 are in the reach state (in this example, only the upper and lower symbols on any winning line are stopped at the same symbol) This is performed in various ways, such as making a variation of only the symbol of the image), or performing an effect using a predetermined character (for example, an effect in which a friend and an enemy character battle). Is done. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. A symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. In the effect symbol display area, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas. (Sometimes a sudden change in probability (for example, “135”) may be stopped).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 are prepared. Among these, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 are fluctuation patterns with only normal reach, and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream and normal reach. Moreover, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 are fluctuation patterns accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach, and super PB3-1 is a fluctuation pattern involving only super reach.

  Note that the “pseudo-ream” is a temporary stop symbol (non-designated display result) that temporarily becomes a non-specific display result (during one variation display) after the display of the variation is started until the display result is derived and displayed. For example, it is an effect in which re-variation is executed once or a plurality of times after the chance symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In other words, when the display of the fluctuation is actually executed once, this is an effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuation is performed a plurality of times. In general, when a pseudo-series effect is executed, the greater the number of re-variations in the pseudo-series, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit can be increased for the player by executing the effect of the pseudo ream and continuously executing more re-variation.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and which has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when the super PA3-1 is used, the revariation is performed once, and when the super PA3-2 is used, the revariation is performed twice. Done. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3-Super PA3-5, Super PB3-2, Special PG1-1-Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1-Special PG2-2 variation patterns are prepared . Among these, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4 are fluctuation patterns with only normal reach, and normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4 are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream together with normal reach. Further, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-5 are fluctuation patterns accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach, and Super PB3-2 is a fluctuation pattern involving only super reach. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Further, when using Super PA3-3, the re-variation is performed once, when using Super PA3-4, the re-variation is performed twice, and when using Super PA3-5, the re-variation is performed three times. Done. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once. In this embodiment, since a variation pattern (super PA 3-5) with a quasi-continuous three times of re-variation is used only when a big hit is made, the re-variation is performed three times during the quasi-continuation. Can recognize that the jackpot has been finalized.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, grouping multiple variation patterns by reach type, variation pattern type including variation pattern without reach, variation pattern type including variation pattern with normal reach, and variation pattern including variation pattern with super reach It may be divided into types. Further, for example, when a pseudo-run is configured to be executable, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by the number of re-changes of the pseudo-run, a change pattern type including a change pattern not accompanied by a pseudo-run, and a re-change 1 It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the first time, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the second variation, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the third variation. In addition, for example, in a case where a specific effect such as a slip effect can be executed in addition to the pseudo ream, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slide effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit and a probabilistic big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, normal reach, and pseudo-continuous Classification into a normal CA3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super CA3-3 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (including those with and without pseudo-ream) It is divided. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern.

  Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream, and a super pattern which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super-reach (including both those with and without pseudo-ream). It is classified into CA2-6.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, ten determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, there are two rounds of sudden probabilistic big hits and more than the gaming value. The case where 15 rounds of big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of gaming value is given will be explained. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, Although the case where it is determined to be one specific gaming state is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the game is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S170 and S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, but is shifted only to the short time state (see step S167 described later). . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is ended (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big winning opening is smaller than in “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, after the two-round jackpot gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability changing state and also to the short time state. Step S170 to be described later). However, in order to make it harder to recognize whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit, the transition to the right change state (high probability state) is made only when a sudden big odd hit is made during the right change state. It is also possible to shift to the short-time state (high base state), and to shift to the high-probability state only when suddenly probable big hit during the normal state, not to shift to the short-time state (high base state). Good.) After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly promising big hit”, when the control is made to the 2 round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the control to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss that is used when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time saving state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 10 shows a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C are used for the case where the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. However, a common variation pattern type determination table for losing may be used in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case of using one probability variation / short-time deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is shown, but a probability variation / short-time state variation pattern type determination table is used. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B is used, but the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-5 and super CA2-6 is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether the time is short or normal, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA3-2 is classified into a normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with superreach (including those with and without pseudo-ream). .

  In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 with a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, as the variation pattern type, the non-reach CA2-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of non-reach and normal variation, and the variation pattern type including a variation pattern with non-reach and a specific effect are included. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach and non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation, normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, Normal CA2-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream, and Super CA2-, which is a variation pattern type including variation patterns with super-reach (including those with and without pseudo-ream). 6 shows a case of classification.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The big hit start designation commands include a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command corresponding to the type of big hit. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden start of sudden probability change big hit when it is a sudden chance big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command for small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. Has occurred, or if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs. If so, start port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If neither the first start winning port switch 13a nor the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the process proceeds to steps S300 to S310 according to the internal state without proceeding to the start port switch passing process (step S312) Do one of the following.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the set contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is on (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S217. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 17) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 17, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (step S217). If the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the processing is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S220). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 17) (step S221). . In the process of step S221, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when the time variation flag indicating that the time reduction state is not set and the time reduction state is set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  In this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. For example, it is determined at the start of the variation whether or not the gaming state has changed since the previous variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state or the short-time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when the big hit is determined, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. . Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S81). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S82). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S83). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S84). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S85). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. It is reset when the display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S85), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S89.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in Step S85), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S86). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S87). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S88). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S85), the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types). 10C) is selected (step S89). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S85 to S89, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 10B is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case of the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90 to be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S92. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. . In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state (see FIG. 10C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (FIG. 10B). ))) Is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the shortened The fluctuation display of fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S85, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S82, S84, S87, S88 or S89. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S91). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S91. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S92). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S93). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S94).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S95). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S96).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S85 to S89 and S90 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-5 and super CA2-6 including a variation pattern type), and select any variation pattern type determination table based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is a sudden probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. Then, when neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S125). When the variation time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state or the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set, and the probability change flag or time reduction flag is set. If is set, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are reset (step S134). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 2 times in the case of a sudden probable big hit) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S140). If the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not controlled and only the time reduction state is controlled), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is- 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S152).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit (step S166). Note that whether or not the probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit is, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03”. This can be determined by checking. If neither the probability change big hit nor the sudden probability change big hit is present (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S171). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the control is unconditionally controlled to both the probability variation state and the short-time state in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, only the probability variation state is controlled. You may make it control not to a short time state (high base state) (namely, high probability / low base state). Also, for example, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, it is checked whether the gaming state is a short time state (high base state), and if the current gaming state is a short time state (high base state), the probability change Control to state and continue short time state (ie, control to high probability / high base state), if current gaming state is not short time state (if low base state), change to high probability / low base state You may make it control.

  Further, on the side of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the production of the common mode is executed after the sudden probability change big hit has occurred and after the small hit has occurred (for example, the subsequent variation display has the same background color ( For example, it may be executed in yellow) (that is, a so-called latent effect is executed), and it may be controlled so that it is impossible to recognize whether or not the state is controlled to be in a certain change state.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is hit. If so, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S173).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol process is shifted to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  28 to 31 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  Further, if the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (a screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to a normal state.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S670). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S673), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S674). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S676). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbols is realized. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit after the end of the variation time. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001).

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 35, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. In any of the five winning lines, a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are even-numbered symbols (usually a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses five winning lines as stop symbols. In any of the above, the combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are an odd symbol (a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a probable big hit) is determined.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the arrangement of effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, since the effect symbols are displayed in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 36, the effect is shown for each of the upper, middle and lower stages on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The arrangement of symbols is defined. 36A shows the arrangement of effect symbols displayed on the upper stage of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and FIG. 36B shows the effect displayed on the middle stage of the display screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 36C shows an arrangement of effect symbols displayed in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the symbols “1” to “8” are arranged in order from the left to the right in the upper and middle stages. As shown in FIG. 36C, the symbols “1” to “8” are arranged in order from the right to the left in the lower row. However, as shown in FIG. 36, the symbols “1” to “8” are arranged with a dummy symbol (“☆” symbol in this example) sandwiched between the symbols.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pay line formed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in this embodiment, in the upper display unit U1, the middle display unit U2, and the lower display unit U3 of the display screen of the production display device 9, the production symbols are in the horizontal direction. Is displayed in a variable manner. When the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in addition to the left column L1, the middle column L2, and the right column L3, from the upper left to the lower right L4 and from the lower left. A total of five winning lines in the upper right L5 are formed, and in any of these winning lines, there may be a big hit symbol or a sudden probability variation big hit symbol / small hit symbol.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in the case where a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Among these, FIG. 38 (A) shows a case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed after the upper and lower stages are aligned with the same symbol on the winning line in the left column L1 and reach a reach state. FIG. 38B shows a case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed after the upper and lower stages are aligned with the same symbol in the winning line in the middle row L2 and reach a reach state. FIG. 38C shows a case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed after the upper and lower stages are aligned with the same symbol in the winning line in the right column L3 and reach a reach state.

  Further, FIG. 38 (D) shows a reach state in which the upper and lower stages are aligned with the same symbol in the diagonal winning lines from upper left to lower right L4 and lower left to upper right L5 (double reach state in FIG. 38 (D)). ), The case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (D), a case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 is shown, but the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the winning line from the lower left to the upper right L5. The same applies to the case.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, when the reach state is reached in any of the vertical winning lines of the left column L1, the middle column L2, or the right column L3, the effect display is performed. Only a single winning line in the display screen of the device 9 is in a single reach state where the reach state is reached. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), when the reach state is in the diagonal winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 or from the lower left to the upper right L5, the upper left to the lower right L4 and the lower left to the upper right L5. In both winning lines, a double reach state is reached.

  When the received display result designation command suddenly shows a probable big hit or small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of “135” effect symbols in one of the five winning lines as a stop symbol. If a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with reach is received in the case of sudden probability big hit, a combination of effect symbols that will be “135” on any winning line is determined as a stop symbol. At the same time, reach design is also determined. In this embodiment, the symbol combination “135” that is finally stopped at any of the winning lines in the case of a sudden probability big hit or a small win is also referred to as a random chance symbol. It is to be noted that the probability chance symbol is not limited to the symbol combination “135” shown in this embodiment, but may be any combination of symbols that can be recognized as suddenly probable big hit or small hit. Or a combination of symbols such as “357”. Further, for example, a combination of symbols similar to a pseudo-chance chance symbol (strong chance symbol symbol, weak chance symbol symbol) to be described later may be used as the random chance symbol symbol. Further, for example, a combination of symbols in which a specific symbol (for example, a symbol with a specific character) is displayed as a middle symbol in the winning line may be used as the chance chance symbol.

  In this embodiment, the probability chance symbol is “135”, but other combinations of symbols (for example, “123”, “357”, and middle symbols are specified as the probability chance symbol). Are used), a stop symbol notice pattern corresponding to the combination of those symbols is prepared in advance, and in the notice effect setting process (see step S8003) described later, those stop symbols are prepared. You may make it set the stop symbol notice effect in case it becomes a chance eye symbol suddenly by selecting a notice pattern. For example, after the notice of the upper left symbol “1” is started, the symbol “3” splits and the notice of the stop symbol notice pattern that starts the notice of the lower left or lower right symbol or the notice of the upper left symbol “3” is started. After the symbol “7” is split and the lower left or lower right symbol is started, the stop symbol warning pattern is started. After the upper left symbol is started, the specific symbol is split and the middle left symbol is notified. May be prepared in advance and selected in the notice effect setting process (see step S8003) described later. Also, for example, when using a combination of symbols similar to the pseudo-continuous chance symbol (strong chance symbol, weak chance symbol) as the chance of chance symbol, for example, in a notice effect setting process (see step S8003) described later, The stop symbol announcement effect may be set using a stop symbol announcement pattern determination table in which a stop symbol announcement pattern similar to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 described later is set.

  Further, in the case of a loss (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is accompanied, the combination of the effect symbols (reach symbols) in which the upper symbol and the lower symbol are aligned is determined in any of the five pay lines. Whether or not to reach can be determined by confirming the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command.

  The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning symbol is a stop symbol by specifying that it is a big hit, disappointment, suddenly probable big hit or small hit based on the variation pattern command, not the display result designation command. It may be. For example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives a variation pattern command for a big hit, it determines a big hit symbol in which three symbols of upper, middle, and lower are aligned with the same symbol in any winning line, and suddenly a probable big hit / small hit. When a variation pattern command for use is received, a stop symbol that is “135” is determined on one of the winning lines, and when a variation pattern command for loss is received, a symbol other than these is determined. It may be.

  If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 also determines a chance eye symbol as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. In this embodiment, a chance symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a pseudo-continuous sequence is also referred to as a pseudo-continuous chance symbol.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the pseudo-ream chance symbol. In this embodiment, the same symbol (the symbol “6” in the example shown in FIG. 39) exists on the display screen of the effect display device 9 between the upper, middle, and lower tiers as the quasi-continuous chance symbol. In the winning lines L1 to L5, the winning combination is not a combination (that is, the same symbol (in the example shown in FIG. 39, the symbol “6”) is not aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L5). A combination of symbols is used. Of these, as shown in FIG. 39B, two of the symbols (in this example, symbol “6”) common to the upper, middle, and lower tiers are aligned on any winning line. A thing is called a strong chance eye symbol, and as shown in FIG. 39 (A), a common symbol (in this example, symbol “6”) between the upper, middle, and lower tiers is not aligned in any winning line. This is called the weak chance design.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39A, as a weak chance symbol symbol, a common symbol (in this example, symbol “6”) is displayed in the upper left, right middle, and middle lower symbol display areas. Although the combination which is arrange | positioned is used, as long as a common symbol does not align at all in any winning line, you may use the combination of another symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39B, as the strong chance symbol, a common symbol (in this example, symbol “6”) is displayed in the upper left, middle middle, and middle lower symbol display areas. A combination that is arranged (that is, a pattern in which two common symbols “6” are aligned in the middle line winning line L2) is used, but two of the common symbols are in any winning line. Other combinations of symbols may be used as long as they are in an aligned state. For example, two common symbols “6” may be used in the left row L1, the right row L3, or the winning line in any one of the upper left to the lower right L4 or the lower left to the upper right L5.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), the symbol “6” as a common symbol is a weak chance symbol symbol arranged in the symbol display area in the upper left, right middle, and middle lower portion. Thus, in this embodiment, there are a total of eight types of weak chance eye symbols in which any of symbols “1” to “8” is arranged in the upper left, right middle, and middle lower symbol display areas as common symbols. . Further, in the example shown in FIG. 39B, a symbol “6” as a common symbol is a strong chance symbol arranged in the symbol display area in the upper left, middle, middle and lower, but will be described later. Thus, in this embodiment, there are a total of eight types of strong chance eye symbols in which any of symbols “1” to “8” is arranged in the upper left, middle middle, and middle lower symbol display areas as common symbols. . Then, as will be described later, it is determined which of the eight types of weak chance eye symbol and the eight types of strong chance eye symbol is to be used as the pseudo continuous chance eye symbol using the pseudo continuous chance eye determination table of FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a pseudo-continuous chance determination table used to determine a pseudo-continuous chance pattern. For example, in step S8002, when determining the pseudo-continuous chance symbol, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a big hit based on the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In the case of a big hit, the big hit pseudo consecutive chance determination table shown in FIG. 40A is selected. On the other hand, if it is out of place, the false consecutive chance index determination table for out of order shown in FIG. 40 (B) is selected. Then, the production control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using a random number for determining the pseudo-continuous chance symbol design using the selected pseudo-continuous chance symbol determination table, and any pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-continuous sequence. Decide if you want a chance symbol.

  In this embodiment, lottery processing using a random number is performed individually for each temporary stop when the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed several times during the variation display of the effect symbol with the pseudo-ream. Which pseudo-chance chance symbol is to be temporarily stopped and displayed (thus, it is determined individually for each temporary stop whether it is a strong chance symbol or a weak chance symbol) . Note that the method of determining the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a plurality of pseudo consecutive chance symbol designs corresponding to the number of temporary stops are prepared in advance and random numbers are used. By deciding which set of quasi-continuous chance symbols will be used by performing a single lottery process, the pseudo-continuous-chance symbols to be displayed temporarily for each temporary stop are determined collectively. (In this case, strong chance symbols and weak chance symbols may be mixed in a plurality of temporary stops). Further, for example, the lottery process using a random number may be performed only once, and the same pseudo-continuous chance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed each time (therefore, when the strong chance symbol is determined, each time When the same strong chance symbol is temporarily displayed and the weak chance symbol is determined, the same weak chance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed each time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, for example, the chance item “1 weak” represents a weak chance event symbol having a common symbol “1” between the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage, and the chance item “1 strong” is the upper stage. This represents a strong chance symbol in which a common symbol “1” exists between the middle and lower tiers. In addition, for example, the chance item “less than 2” represents a weak chance event symbol having a common symbol “2” between the upper, middle, and lower tiers, and the chance item “high 2” is between the upper, middle, and lower tiers. This represents a strong chance eye symbol with a common symbol “2”. Thereafter, the chances of “3 weak”, “3 strong”, “4 weak”, “4 strong”, “5 weak”, “5 strong”, “6 weak”, “6 strong”, “7 weak”, “ The same applies to "7", "8" and "8".

  As shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in the big hit pseudo-continuous chance determination table (FIG. 40A), compared with the pseudo-continuous chance determination table for losing (FIG. 40B). In response to strong chances (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”) Many judgment values are assigned. For this reason, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the ratio that a strong chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol during the pseudo-continuous rendering is higher than that in the case of a loss. Accordingly, when the pseudo-ream is executed during the variation display of the effect symbols, if the ratio of the strong chance eye symbol temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol is high, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in the big hit pseudo consecutive chance determination table (FIG. 40 (A)), the losing pseudo continuous chance determination table (FIG. 40 (B)) and In comparison, among the strong chance symbols, in particular, odd-numbered symbols exist as common symbols between the upper, middle and lower tiers ("1 strong", "3 strong", "5 strong", "7 strong"). )), Many judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, as compared with the case of being out of place, the one that has odd symbols as a common symbol as a strong chance symbol during temporary rendering is temporarily displayed. The ratio is high. Therefore, when the pseudo-ream is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, if the ratio of the odd chance symbol that is present as a common symbol is displayed as a temporary stop is high, the player can further expect a big hit Can be increased. In addition, even if the same pseudo-chance chance symbol is used, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which symbol the common symbol in the pseudo-chance chance symbol will be, and it is interesting for the game. Can be improved.

  Note that the method of allocating the judgment value in the quasi-continuous chance determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of a big hit, a specific symbol is compared with the case of a loss. It may be configured such that the ratio of the strong chance symbol having only (for example, symbol “7”) as a common symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is increased.

  In addition, in the case of a big hit, it is not limited to increasing the ratio of selecting a strong chance eye symbol that has an odd symbol or a specific symbol as a common symbol, for example, an odd symbol or a specific symbol in the case of a probable big hit However, the selection ratio of the strong chance eye symbol that exists as a common symbol may be increased. If configured in this manner, if the odd chance symbol or a specific symbol present as a common symbol is a high chance that the strong chance symbol is displayed in a temporary stop, it will be a probable big hit for the player and will be shifted to the probable state. Can raise the expectation for the thing. In addition, even if the same pseudo-chance chance symbol is used, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which symbol the common symbol in the pseudo-chance chance symbol will be, and it is interesting for the game. Can be improved.

  Note that the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is not limited to the combination of symbols such as the strong chance symbol and weak chance symbol shown in this embodiment. A combination of performance symbols that is “135” in any of them may be used as the pseudo-ream chance symbol. In the case of using a combination of effect symbols that is “135” in any of the five winning lines as the pseudo chance event symbol, for example, a notice effect setting process described later (see step S8003). ), A stop symbol announcement effect may be set using a stop symbol announcement pattern determination table in which stop symbol announcement patterns similar to those shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 described later are set.

  In step S8002, for example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. The stop symbol and temporary stop symbol are determined. That is, a stop symbol or a temporary stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of effect symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number. Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol or temporary stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining whether or not the notice effect is to be executed in the effect display device 9 during the change display of the effect symbol and setting the effect aspect of the notice effect (step S8003). ). In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern are determined as the notice effect.

  The “stop symbol notice effect” is a notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in any one or a plurality of symbol display areas before the fluctuation display result of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, first, by displaying a symbol image on the upper display portion of the plurality of display portions (in this embodiment, the upper left symbol display area and the upper right symbol display area). Then, the stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbols derived and displayed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas is started. Then, after a new symbol image appears at the symbol image display position in the symbol display area in the upper left or upper right corner, the symbol image is displayed in the lower left, left middle, lower right, middle middle, right middle, Move to the lower and middle symbol display area, and develop it into a stop symbol warning effect that gives notice to the effect symbols derived and displayed in the lower left, left middle, lower right, middle middle, right middle and middle lower symbol display areas Production is performed.

  In this embodiment, the “first display unit” corresponds to, for example, the upper display unit, and the “first image” displayed on the first display unit is, for example, the upper symbol in the stop symbol notice effect. This corresponds to an image displayed in the upper left or upper right symbol display area in the display unit (an image including an effect symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area). In this embodiment, the “second display unit” corresponds to, for example, a middle or lower display unit, and “a second image newly appearing at the display position of the first image is displayed in the second display unit. “Move” refers to, for example, splitting an image (design image) displayed as a stop symbol preview effect in the upper left or upper right symbol display area in the upper display portion and lower left in the middle or lower display portion. And move to the symbol display area in the lower left, lower right, middle middle, right middle, middle lower, and stop symbol notice effect in the lower left, left middle, lower right, middle middle, right middle, middle lower symbol display area Is equivalent to In this case, the “second image newly appearing at the display position of the first image” is an image having the same symbol as the symbol displayed in the symbol display area on the upper left or upper right in the upper display unit. There are also cases where the images are of different designs.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol notification effect is first started in the upper left or upper right symbol display area in the upper display portion, and then the upper left or upper right symbol display area in the upper display portion is notified. It shows the case where the image that has appeared is split and developed into a stop symbol warning effect in the lower left, left middle, lower right, middle middle, right middle, and middle lower symbol display areas in the middle and lower display areas. The mode of the stop symbol notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, after starting stop symbol notice effects in various symbol display areas such as middle top and left middle, the image that appeared as the notice of symbol display areas such as middle top and middle left is divided into the top left and You may make it move to various symbol display areas, such as an upper right, and develop it to the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area of the movement destination.

  In addition, when configured as described above, depending on which stop symbol notice effect is first started, such as upper left, middle upper, upper right, left middle, etc. You may comprise so that (reliability) may differ. In this case, for example, first, stop symbol notice patterns for starting stop symbol notice effects in various symbol display areas such as upper left, middle upper, upper right, and left middle are prepared in advance, and stop symbols similar to those shown in FIGS. The presence / absence of stop symbol notice effect or the stop symbol advance notice pattern may be determined in a batch using the notice pattern determination table, or the lottery process using random numbers is executed individually, and the presence / absence of stop symbol notice effect is selected. It may be determined sequentially in order to start the stop symbol announcement effect first in the symbol display area or to which symbol display area the divided image is moved to develop the stop symbol announcement effect.

  In addition, in the notice effect setting process in step S8003, whether or not the notice effects such as a step-up notice effect, a motif display notice effect, a group notice effect, a button notice effect, a mini character notice effect, etc. are executed in the notice effect setting process in step S8003. And a production mode may be set.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8004 (step S8005).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 41 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is determined in step S8003 that the notice effect is to be executed, a process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is set is selected and the notice effect is not decided to be executed. In this case, a process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the stop symbol advance notice effect, process data in which data corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice effect is set is selected. In this case, the process table corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice pattern specified by the stop symbol advance execution flag set in the notice effect setting process described later is selected.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the upper symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the lower symbol is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed. Process data is set to indicate that is stopped and displayed. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In this embodiment, when the quasi-ream is executed, the initial variation in the quasi-ream is executed according to the process table selected in step S8004, and then the process timer is switched by switching the process data for each re-variation. It is assumed that each re-variation (including final variation) is executed by restarting (see steps S8111 to S8113 described later).

  Even if the pseudo-ream is executed, the process data including the re-variation is selected at a time in step S8004 without changing the process data, and the change display of the effect design accompanied by the pseudo-ream is displayed. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, a plurality of process data is prepared in advance in accordance with the presence / absence of stop symbol notice effect and effect pattern for each re-variation, and in accordance with the setting contents of the stop symbol notice effect in step S8003, Process data in consideration of the presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the effect pattern may be selected in a lump, and in accordance with the selected process data, step S8105, which will be described later, may be executed to display the variation display of the effect symbol.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 produces the production device (production display device 9 as production component for variably displaying production symbols according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, the control of various lamps as the production component and the speaker 27) as the production component is started (step S8006). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  42 to 44 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting processing in step S8003. In the notice effect setting processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002 is a combination of symbols that become a normal big hit symbol or a probable big hit symbol in the winning line L1 ( Step S1501). If the winning line L1 is a combination of a symbol that is a normal jackpot symbol or a probable variation jackpot symbol, the effect control CPU 101 uses the L1 normal / probability change as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol preview effect and the stop symbol preview pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for jackpot is selected (step S1502). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If it is not a combination of a symbol that is a normal jackpot symbol or a probability variable jackpot symbol in the winning line L1, the effect control CPU 101 will have the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002 become a normal jackpot symbol or a probability variable jackpot symbol in the winning line L4. It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination of symbols (step S1503). If the winning line L4 is a combination of symbols that become a normal jackpot symbol or a probable change jackpot symbol, the effect control CPU 101 uses the L4 normal / probability change as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for jackpot is selected (step S1504). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  In this embodiment, of the five winning lines formed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the winning line in the left column L1 or the winning line in the diagonal direction from the upper left to the lower right L4 is a big hit or sudden change in probability. The middle row L2 shows a case where it is determined whether or not the big hit / small hit, reach, etc. are determined, and the stop symbol notice pattern determination table is selected based on the determination result to set the stop symbol notice effect. Judgment whether or not big win, sudden probability change big hit / small hit, reach, etc., in the diagonal winning line from the lower left to the upper right L5, and the right row L3, and select the stop symbol advance pattern determination table based on the judgment result Then, a stop symbol notice effect may be set. In this case, depending on whether the winning line in the oblique direction from the middle row L2, the right row L3, the lower left to the upper right L5 is a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach or the like, FIGS. ~ Prepare the stop symbol advance pattern determination table similar to Fig. 58, determine whether it will be a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach, etc., and determine the stop symbol advance pattern based on the determination result A table may be selected.

  For example, if the winning line of the middle row L2 is a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach, etc., the symbol image in the middle upper symbol display area is split and a new middle, middle or lower symbol display is made. A stop symbol notice effect in the area may be generated. Also, for example, if the winning line in the right column L3 is a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach, etc., the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split and newly right middle or lower right symbols are newly created. A stop symbol notice effect in the display area may be generated. Further, for example, when the winning line in the oblique direction from the lower left to the upper right L5 becomes a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach, etc., the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split and newly A stop symbol notice effect may be generated in the lower left symbol display area. In this case, after the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split, a single symbol is generated depending on whether a stop symbol warning effect is generated in the lower left symbol display area or a stop symbol warning effect is generated in the lower right symbol display area. There can be a case where it is a reach notice effect and a case where it is a double reach notice effect, and a stop symbol notice effect on the winning line in the diagonal direction from the left row L1 or the upper left to the lower right L4 shown in this embodiment, A similar effect can be obtained.

  If the winning line L4 is not a combination of a normal jackpot symbol or a symbol that becomes a probable variation jackpot symbol, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002 is a sudden probability variable jackpot symbol or a small bonus symbol in the winning line L1. It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination of symbols (step S1505). In the winning line L1, if it is a combination of symbols that suddenly become a probable big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, the effect control CPU 101 uses L1 sudden probability change as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol advance notice effect and the stop symbol advance notice pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for big hit / small hit is selected (step S1506). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If the winning line L1 is not a combination of suddenly probable big hit symbols or small hit symbols, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the directing symbol determined in step S8002 is suddenly probable big hit symbol or small hit symbol in the winning line L4. It is confirmed whether or not the combination of symbols becomes (step S1507). In the winning line L4, if it is a combination of symbols that become suddenly probable big hit symbols or small hit symbols, the effect control CPU 101 uses the L4 sudden probability change as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for big hit / small hit is selected (step S1508). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If the winning line L4 is not a combination of suddenly probable big hit symbols or small hit symbols (ie, it is out of place), the production control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the production symbol determined in step S8002 is the winning line L1. It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination of symbols that will be a reach-removed symbol (an off-symbol in a state where only the left and right are aligned with the same symbol) (step S1509). If it is a combination of symbols that will be out of reach in the winning line L1, the CPU 101 for effect control will use the stop symbol notice for L1 reach out as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern. A pattern determination table is selected (step S1510). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If it is not a combination of symbols that will be the reach-removed symbols in the winning line L1, the effect control CPU 101 will have the stop symbols of the effect symbols determined in step S8002 in the winning line L4, the reach-removed symbols (only the left and right are in the same pattern) It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination of symbols (step S1511). If it is a combination of symbols that will result in a loss-of-reach symbol on the winning line L4, the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop symbol notification for L4 reach deviation as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notification effect and determining the stop symbol notification pattern. A pattern determination table is selected (step S1512). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If it is not a combination of symbols that will be out of reach in the winning line L4, the effect control CPU 101 is in a state in which the stop symbols of the effect symbols determined in step S8002 are aligned in the same pattern only in the upper left and middle left in the winning line L1. It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination of symbols that will become a missing symbol (step S1513). In the winning line L1, if it is a combination of symbols that are out-of-line symbols in which only the upper left and middle left are aligned with the same symbol, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the stop symbol warning effect and the stop symbol warning pattern. As the table, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for detachment of the same symbol on L1 is selected (step S1514). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If it is not a combination of symbols in which the upper left and middle left of the winning line L1 are the same symbols, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the effect determined in step S8002 is the upper left in the winning line L4. And it is confirmed whether it is a combination of symbols that become out-of-order symbols in a state where only the middle and the middle are aligned (step S1515). In the winning line L4, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the stop symbol warning effect and the stop symbol warning pattern if the combination is a symbol that is a slashed symbol in which only the upper left and middle lines are aligned in the same symbol. As a table, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol on L4 is selected (step S1516). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  In the winning line L4, if the combination is not a symbol that is an outlier symbol in which only the upper left and middle lines are aligned in the same pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the effect determined in step S8002 is the upper left in the winning line L1. And it is confirmed whether the lower left is a combination of symbols that are “1” and “5” (step S1517). In the winning line L1, if the upper left and lower left are “1” and “5”, the effect control CPU 101 has a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol warning effect and determining the stop symbol warning pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for deviation in which L1 upper and lower are “1” and “5” is selected (step S1518). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If the upper left and lower left of the winning line L1 are not a combination of outlier symbols “1” and “5”, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the stop symbol of the effect determined in step S8002 is the upper left and lower right in the winning line L4. It is confirmed whether or not the combination is a combination of off-set symbols that become “1” and “5” (step S1519). In the winning line L4, if the upper left and lower right are “1” and “5”, the effect control CPU 101 is a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect and determining the stop symbol notice pattern. , L4 upper and lower stop symbol notice pattern determination table for “1” “5” is selected (step S1520). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  If the upper left and lower right in the winning line L4 are not a combination of outlier symbols “1” and “5”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002 is the upper left and middle left in the pay line L1. It is confirmed whether or not the combination is a combination of off-symbols that becomes “1” and “3” (step S1521). In the winning line L1, if the upper left and the middle left are combinations of outlier symbols that are “1” and “3”, the effect control CPU 101 serves as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect and determining the stop symbol notice pattern. , The stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L1 is selected (step S1522). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  In the winning line L1, if the winning line L1 is not a combination of off-line symbols whose upper left and middle left are “1” and “3”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the stopping symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002 is in the winning line L4. It is confirmed whether or not the upper left and the middle are combinations of outlier symbols with “1” and “3” (step S1523). In the winning line L4, if the upper left and middle are “1” and “3”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop symbol notice effect as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect. , The stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L4 is selected (step S1524). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  In the winning line L4, the upper left and the middle are neither “1” or “3” in combination (i.e., any of the winning lines L1, L4 is a big hit, suddenly probable big hit / small hit, reach state, etc.) Combinations of symbols that do not become a state (however, the winning lines L2, L3, and L5 include situations such as big wins, suddenly probable big hits / small hits, reach states, etc.)) The other stop symbol notice pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern (step S1525). Then, control goes to a step S1526.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop symbol notification pattern determination table selected in steps S1502, S1504, S1506, S1508, S1510, S1512, S1514, S1516, S1518, S1520, S1522, S1524, and S1525 to stop symbol notification. A lottery process is performed on the basis of whether or not the performance is executed and the stop symbol for warning pattern determination random number for determining the stop symbol for warning pattern, and whether or not the stop symbol warning effect is executed and the stop symbol for warning pattern are determined (step S1526).

  Then, when it is determined that the stop symbol notice effect is to be executed (step S1527), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol notice execution flag indicating that the stop symbol notice effect is to be executed (step S1528). In this case, the production control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol advance pattern determined in step S1526.

  For example, a separate stop symbol advance execution flag is prepared for each stop symbol advance notice pattern in advance, and in step S1528, a stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice pattern is set among a plurality of types of stop symbol advance notice flags. (For example, when the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 described later is determined, the stop symbol advance notice execution flag 1 is set, and when the stop symbol advance notice pattern 2 is determined, the stop symbol advance notice execution flag 2 is set. Or may be set). For example, when the stop symbol advance notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the stop symbol advance notice flag is set to a predetermined bit in the stop symbol advance notice execution flag to stop. The symbol notice pattern may be specified.

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S1501 to S1528, the presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern in the variable symbol display are determined.

  In this embodiment, even when the pseudo-ream is executed in the variation display of the effect symbols, whether or not to execute the stop-symbol advance notice effect and the stop-symbol advance notice pattern in the final variation in the pseudo-ream are steps S1501 to S1528. Determined by the process. Whether or not the stop symbol notice effect is executed and the stop symbol notice pattern for each change from the initial change of the pseudo-ream to the re-change one before the final change are determined by the processing of the subsequent steps S1529 to S1537. The

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command (step S1529). In the case where the quasi-continuation is executed, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the current number of processes has reached the number of temporary stops (the number of times that the temporary stop symbol is displayed temporarily during the pseudo-continuations) ( Step S1530). For example, a fluctuation pattern (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, super PA3-1, normal PB2-3, super PA3-3, special PG1-3) accompanied by one re-variation pseudo-continuation by a fluctuation pattern command. If it is specified, it is determined whether or not the current processing number has reached one. Also, for example, when a variation pattern (normal PB2-2, super PA3-2, normal PB2-4, super PA3-4) with two revariations is specified by the variation pattern command, It is determined whether or not the number of processes has reached 2. Further, for example, when a variation pattern (super PA 3-5) with three re-variations is designated by the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the current number of processes has reached three.

  If the number of processes has not reached the number of temporary stops, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the temporary stop symbol determined in step S8002 is a strong chance symbol (step S1531). If it is not a strong chance symbol (that is, if a weak chance symbol is determined), the production control CPU 101 uses a weak symbol as a table for determining whether or not to execute a stop symbol announcement effect and a stop symbol announcement pattern. A stop symbol notice pattern determination table for chances is selected (step S1532). On the other hand, if the strong chance eye symbol is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol warning pattern for the strong chance eye as a table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol warning effect and the stop symbol warning pattern. A table is selected (step S1533).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for the pseudo continuous temporary stop selected in steps S1532 and S1533 (the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for the weak chance eye or the stop symbol advance pattern determination for the strong chance eye). Table), a lottery process is performed based on the random number for determining the stop symbol advance notice pattern, and whether or not to execute the stop symbol advance notice effect and the stop symbol advance notice pattern are determined (step S1534).

  Then, when it is determined that the stop symbol notice effect is to be executed (step S1535), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol notice execution flag (step S1536). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the number of temporary stops and the stop symbol advance notice pattern determined in step S1534.

  For example, a separate stop symbol advance execution flag is prepared for each temporary stop count and stop symbol advance notice pattern, and in step S1536, the number of temporary stop and stop symbol advance notice patterns among a plurality of types of stop symbol advance execution flags is supported. The stop symbol advance execution flag may be set. Further, for example, when the stop symbol advance notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value corresponding to the number of temporary stops and the stop symbol advance notice pattern is set in a predetermined bit of the stop symbol advance notice execution flag. Accordingly, the number of temporary stops and the stop symbol notice pattern may be specified.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of processes (step S1537), and proceeds to step S1530. Then, the processes in steps S1530 to S1537 are repeatedly executed until the number of processes reaches the number of temporary stops. By executing the processes of steps S1529 to S1537, whether or not the stop symbol notice effect is executed and the stop symbol are determined for each change from the initial change to the re-change before the final change when the pseudo-run is executed. A notice pattern is determined.

  In this embodiment, when determining the pseudo-continuous chance symbol in the case of pseudo-ream, the pseudo-continuous chance determining table shown in FIG. 40 is determined depending on whether it is a big hit or not. By selecting and performing a lottery process using random numbers, a big chance symbol is determined at a high rate compared to the case of being a big hit, and when setting a stop symbol notice effect, Regardless of whether it is a big hit or not, using the common stop pattern notice pattern determination table for weak chances and strong chances shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 (when weak chances are determined) 49 selects the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the weak chance eye shown in FIG. 49, and when the strong chance eye symbol is determined, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the strong chance eye shown in FIG. This shows the case where the presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern are determined. However, it is different for the case of weak chance or strong chance that is different from the case of being a big hit. The presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern may be determined using the stop symbol notice pattern determination table. In this case, for example, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for weak chances and strong chances at the time of big hit is compared with the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for weak chances and strong chances at the time of loss, The determination value may be assigned so that the stop symbol notice effect is executed at a high rate.

  45 to 59 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 45 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L1 normal / probability big hit selected in step S1502. FIG. 46 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L4 normal / probability variation big hit selected in step S1504. FIG. 47 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the L1 sudden probability variation big hit / small hit selected in step S1506. FIG. 48 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the L4 sudden probability variation big hit / small hit selected in step S1508. FIG. 49 shows a specific example of a stop chance notice pattern determination table for weak chances selected in step S1532. FIG. 50 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the strong chance eye selected in step S1533. FIG. 51 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L1 reach deviation selected in step S1510. FIG. 52 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L4 reach deviation selected in step S1512. FIG. 53 shows a specific example of a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol in L1 selected in step S1514. FIG. 54 shows a specific example of a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol in the upper L4 selected in step S1516. FIG. 55 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “5” in L1 up and down selected in step S1518. FIG. 56 shows a specific example of the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “5” L4 selected in step S1520. FIG. 57 shows a specific example of a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L1 selected in step S1522. FIG. 58 shows a specific example of a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L4 selected in step S1524. FIG. 59 shows a specific example of the other stop symbol notice pattern determination table selected in step S1525.

  First, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L1 normal / probability variation big hit selected in step S1502 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 1 to 12 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for the L1 normal / probability big hit. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 1 to 12 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 1 to 12 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 1 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area is divided to generate a new stop symbol notice effect, and the stop symbol notice effect that notifies the final stop displayed in the lower left symbol display area is announced. To start.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect is divided to generate a new stop symbol notice effect. Specifically, the stop symbol notice effect that is already being executed (the stop symbol notice effect of the original source) In the state that the execution continues, the kite also produces an aspect in which the image of another symbol is split from the image of the symbol that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect during the execution, and the divided thin It is to execute an effect in such a manner that the display position of the display symbol (a newly generated stop symbol notice effect) is moved to another symbol display area. For example, in the stop symbol notice pattern 1, the stop symbol notice effect currently being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues to be executed, and the same symbol as the symbol that is displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area is split. The effect of the aspect which moves the pattern of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of such an aspect and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  In this embodiment, when a stop symbol notice effect is executed, an effect is executed in such a manner that the same symbol as the effect symbol that is finally stopped is displayed lightly in the symbol display area. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect is executed, the same effect symbol as that for which the stop symbol notice effect has been notified is always stopped and displayed (that is, the content of the stop symbol notice effect). And the final stop symbol of the actual production symbol are the same). However, in this embodiment, will be described later? When a notice effect is produced (an effect in such a manner that another symbol is split from a symbol that is lightly displayed as a stop symbol notice effect that is currently being executed, but the split symbol is displayed with “?”) Does that necessarily mean? The same design as the symbol that was announced in the notice effect is not always displayed in the final stop, is it? The content of the notice effect may not match the final stop symbol of the actual effect symbol. That is, the split symbol is displayed with “?”? When the notice effect is executed, the symbol as it was noticed may be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, or a symbol different from the noticed symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a big hit or reach is lost, the same symbol is split in the upper left symbol display area and moved to the lower left or lower right symbol display area to generate a new stop symbol notice effect. However, it is not necessarily limited to a mode in which the same symbol is divided. For example, even in the case of a big hit or a loss of reach, the symbol display area on the upper left and the symbol on the lower left and the symbol on the lower left or lower right are split. It may be moved to the display area, and after reaching the lower left or lower right symbol display area, it may be changed to the same symbol as the upper left symbol display area to generate a new stop symbol notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect is split, there are two types of split modes, a red mode split and a blue mode split. For example, when a red pattern is split, an effect of a mode in which another symbol is split in such a manner that a symbol that is lightly displayed as a stop symbol notice effect that is being executed shines red is executed. Further, when the division of the blue mode is performed, an effect of a mode in which another symbol is split in such a mode that the symbol that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed glows blue is executed. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 is used, an effect is generated in which the stop symbol advance notice effect being executed in the left symbol display area is split in red to generate a new stop symbol advance notice effect. .

  In addition, how to make the division | segmentation aspect of a stop symbol notification effect differ is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, there are various ways of splitting, such as providing a pattern that splits while rotating and a pattern that does not split, or changing the sound effect that is output at the timing when the pattern splits.

  Also, for example, by providing one that moves linearly from the upper left symbol display area toward the lower left or lower right symbol display area and one that moves in a curved line, the division pattern of the stop symbol notice effect is differentiated. May be. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the symbol is split in such a manner that it shines red or blue when it is displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is shown. For example, the divided symbol is a symbol in the lower left or lower right. You may change the split pattern of the stop symbol notice effect by performing an effect that shines red or blue while moving toward the display area, and reach the symbol display area at the lower left or lower right. After that, an effect of an aspect that shines red or blue may be executed to change the division aspect of the stop symbol notice effect.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 2 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the variation display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 3 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The display of the lower stage design is performed while the divided display design is moved to the lower left design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  In addition? When a notice effect is executed, an image with a “?” Display added to the divided symbol after the symbol displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed in another symbol display area (in this example, You may move to the lower left or lower right symbol display area), and move only the divided symbols to other symbol display areas (lower left or lower right symbol display area in this example). After reaching the previous symbol display area (in this example, the lower left or lower right symbol display area), a “?” Display may be added and displayed.

  In this embodiment,? When the notice effect is executed, the image displayed as the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area on the upper left side always shows a case where the image is divided in red. In the case of developing into a notice effect, an image displayed as a stop symbol notice effect in the upper left symbol display area is provided with a stop symbol notice pattern that splits in red and a stop symbol notice pattern that splits in blue. Also good. This also applies to FIGS. 46 to 59 described later.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 4 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 5 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 6 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the left middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 7 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 8 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the display of the lower stage, the divided display symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while performing the variable display of the lower stage effect symbols. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 9 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area on the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, The effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, the fading-out symbol is faded into the display screen again and moved to the middle left symbol display area, and the heel stops in the middle left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which became the symbol notice effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in the example of the stop symbol notice pattern 9, it is shown that the division of the stop symbol notice effect has once ended, and it is revived and stopped in other symbol display areas. As a notice effect, it is shown that the division of the stop symbol notice effect has once ended in the symbol display area in the lower left, and it becomes the stop symbol notice effect in the middle left symbol display area. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, once the divided symbol has passed through the symbol display area in the middle left, it appears as if the symbol stop effect in the symbol display area in the middle left has failed, and the symbol warning in the symbol display area in the lower left A stop symbol notice pattern may be provided. This also applies to stop symbol notice patterns 29, 49, 69, 126, 136, 166, and 176 described later. Also, for example, once the divided symbol passes through the middle left symbol display area, the stop symbol notice effect in the left middle symbol display area is not established, and the stop does not become the stop symbol notice in the lower left symbol display area. A symbol notice pattern may also be provided.

  In the stop symbol preview patterns 7 to 9, the divided symbols may be temporarily stopped in the lower left symbol display area and then faded out of the display screen, or temporarily stopped in the lower left symbol display area. You may make it fade out outside a display screen, without making it display (it passes through as it is). In addition, the divided symbols may not be faded out of the display screen, but may be displayed as they disappear in the display screen (for example, display of a mode of gradually becoming transparent and disappearing). In this case, the divided symbols may be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area in the lower left and then disappeared, or displayed in the symbol display area in the lower left without disappearing (through). May be. Further, for example, the divided symbols may be deleted before reaching the lower left symbol display area while moving the symbols. This also applies to FIGS. 46 to 59 described later.

  In this embodiment, after dividing the symbol in the upper left symbol display area, there may be a case where a new stop symbol notice effect is established in another symbol display area and a case where it is not established. For example, as shown in the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 and the stop symbol advance notice pattern 2, a symbol split in the upper left symbol display area moves and a new stop symbol advance notice effect occurs in the lower left symbol display area. This corresponds to the case where a new stop symbol notice effect is established, and as shown in the stop symbol notice pattern 7 and the stop symbol notice pattern 8, even if the divided symbol moves in the upper left symbol display area, it fades out. Thus, a case where no new stop symbol notice effect is generated corresponds to a case where a new stop symbol notice effect is not established.

  For example, as shown in the stop symbol notice pattern 1 and the stop symbol notice pattern 2, even if a new stop symbol notice effect is generated, the divided symbols are moved to the symbol display area at the lower left and are newly displayed. Various modes are conceivable, not limited to the mode in which a stop symbol notice effect is generated. For example, the divided symbols may appear to fade out from the display screen and fade in to the lower left symbol display area again to establish a new stop symbol notice effect. Further, for example, the divided symbols may be displayed as if they have once faded and disappeared, and displayed again at the original density in the lower left symbol display area, so that a new stop symbol notice effect is established.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 10 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect currently being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 11 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the pattern of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of a left middle and a lower left is performed, respectively performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a middle stage and a lower stage. Note that the same symbol as the symbol displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area may be divided into two at the same timing, or may be divided into two with a slight time difference (for example, 1 second).

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 12 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the lower left symbol display area are started. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while displaying the variation of the upper-stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly is started, and at the same timing, In the symbol display area, while the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage is being performed, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (in this case, the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper left) is displayed lightly is started.

  In the stop symbol advance notice patterns 1 to 12, for example, the effect contents of the stop symbol advance notice effect displayed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas are the stop symbol advance notice pattern and the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S8002. Set based on. For example, when the symbol “6” is determined as the final stop symbol of the top left effect symbol, a stop symbol notice effect in a mode of displaying an image corresponding to the symbol “6” in the symbol display area at the upper left is executed. When the symbol “7” is determined as the final stop symbol of the top left effect symbol, the stop symbol notice effect in a mode in which an image corresponding to the symbol “7” is displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is executed. This also applies to FIGS. 46 to 59 to be described later, and the contents of the effect of each stop symbol notice effect are the stop symbol of the selected stop symbol notice pattern and the stop symbol or temporary stop of the effect symbol determined in step S8002. It is set based on the design.

  In this embodiment, as shown in the stop symbol advance notice pattern 3 and the stop symbol advance notice pattern 6,? As a notice, in the symbol display area in the lower left or middle left? The case where an image with a display is displayed is shown, but the symbol is displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left. Display an image with a display? The notice may be configured to be executable. Also, in this embodiment, after the stop symbol advance notice effect is started in the upper left symbol display area, the image displayed as the stop symbol advance notice effect in the upper left symbol display area is always divided and a new stop symbol advance notice is provided. In the case of producing an effect, for example, a stop symbol advance that does not split / develop into a stop symbol advance effect to the left middle or lower left symbol display area simply by executing the stop symbol advance effect in the upper left symbol display area A pattern may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol notice pattern is a mode in which a stop symbol notice effect such as the stop symbol notice patterns 1 to 11 is divided to generate another stop symbol notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol notice effect”). , Which is also referred to as a stop symbol notice effect in a split mode) and a plurality of stop symbol notice effects such as a stop symbol notice pattern 12 (hereinafter also referred to as a stop symbol notice effect in a simultaneous start mode). Broadly divided. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, relative to the stop symbol notice patterns 1 to 11 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the split mode is executed, More determination values are assigned than the stop symbol advance notice pattern 12 in which the stop symbol advance notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the stop symbol notice effect is executed, but also when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears, compared to the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears. Thus, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. It should be noted that the allocation of judgment values for the stop symbol notice pattern 12 is relatively increased, and the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears is larger than the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears. You may make it the expectation degree with respect to become high.

  Also, in this embodiment, when one symbol is divided from an already running stop symbol notice effect and another stop symbol notice effect is generated, it becomes a stop symbol notice effect in the left middle symbol display area. In some cases, the stop symbol notice effect in the lower left symbol display area may be a stop symbol notice effect 4 as a stop symbol notice effect in the middle left symbol display area as shown in FIG. Compared with the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 which is a stop symbol advance notice effect in the lower left symbol display area, many determination values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect in the division mode is executed and the stop symbol notice effect in the middle left symbol display area is generated, the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the lower left symbol display area. Compared to the case, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. Note that the number of judgment values assigned to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 is increased, and the stop symbol advance notice effect in the lower left symbol display area occurs more than the stop symbol advance notice effect in the middle left symbol display area. However, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be high.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, only in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, two same symbols are split from the already executed stop symbol notice effect, and the left middle and lower left symbols respectively. A stop symbol notice pattern 11 for generating a stop symbol notice effect in the display area is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, when two identical symbols are divided from the already-executed stop symbol notice effect, and stop symbol notice effects are generated in the left middle and lower left symbol display areas (that is, the left column L1). If the stop symbol notice effect is executed in all of the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas in the winning line of No. 1 and it is in a state of notifying that it will be a big hit symbol), the big hit will be confirmed. Therefore, the expectation level for the big hit can be increased as more symbols are divided when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in stop symbol notice patterns 50 and 70 of FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 described later, stop symbol notice effects are executed in all upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (“135”). In some cases, the chance of chance is fixed.

  In addition, even if it is a case of detachment, for example, in the design? You may comprise so that the image to which the display was attached | subjected may be displayed and a stop symbol notification effect may be performed in all the upper, lower, and lower symbol display areas. In this case, for example, the stop symbol notice effect is executed as if the same symbol is stopped and displayed in all the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, but in at least one of the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas? An image with a display may be displayed. In addition, for example, a stop symbol notice effect is performed by executing stop symbol notice effects in all of the upper, lower, and lower symbol display areas. In at least one of the symbol display areas below? An image with a display may be displayed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when one symbol is split from the already running stop symbol notice effect and another stop symbol notice effect is generated, the symbol is divided in the red form and in the blue form. As shown in FIG. 45, a red symbol is used for the stop symbol warning pattern 8 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in a blue color. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 7 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the symbols are divided, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for the stop symbol notice pattern 1 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is produced after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 2, many judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L4 normal / probability big hit selected in step S1504 will be described using FIG. As shown in FIG. 46, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 21 to 33 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for L4 normal / probability big hit. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 21 to 33 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 21 to 33 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 21 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 22 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 23 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red In this mode, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 24 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of a middle is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 25 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of a middle is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 26 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 27 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 28 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 29 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, Once, the effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, the fading-out symbols that are faded out once again fade in the display screen, moved to the middle symbol display area, and stopped in the middle symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which became the symbol notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 30 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect currently being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 31 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper right symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 32 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. An effect of a mode in which the divided and thinly displayed symbols are moved to the middle, middle and lower right symbol display areas, respectively, while the middle stage and the lower stage of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the same symbol as the symbol displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area may be divided into two at the same timing, or may be divided into two with a slight time difference (for example, 1 second).

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 33 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. The stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and the stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the lower right are started. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while displaying the variation of the upper-stage effect symbol, the effect of a mode in which the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is started thinly, and at the same timing, the lower right In the symbol display area, the effect design is started such that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (in this case, the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper left) is displayed lightly while the lower effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, relative to the stop symbol notice patterns 21 to 32 in which the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed. Thus, more determination values are assigned than the stop symbol notice pattern 33 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the stop symbol notice effect is executed, but also when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears, compared to the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears. Thus, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. In addition, the allocation of the judgment value for the stop symbol notice pattern 33 is relatively increased, and the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears is larger than the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears. You may make it the expectation degree with respect to become high.

  Also, in this embodiment, when one symbol is divided from an already running stop symbol notice effect and another stop symbol notice effect is generated, it becomes a stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area. As shown in FIG. 46, there is a case in which the stop symbol notice pattern 24 in the middle symbol display area is a stop symbol notice effect. Thus, many determination values are assigned as compared with the stop symbol advance notice pattern 21 which is a stop symbol advance notice effect in the lower right symbol display area. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed and a stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area occurs, the stop symbol notice effect in the lower right symbol display area is displayed. Compared with the case where it occurs, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased. When the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the middle symbol display area when the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the symbol display area in the lower right when the allocation of judgment values to the stop symbol notice pattern 21 is increased. Rather than expecting a big hit, you may make it high.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, only in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the two same symbols are split from the already executed stop symbol notice effect, and the middle, middle and lower right are respectively divided. A stop symbol notice pattern 32 for generating a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, when two same symbols are split from the already running stop symbol notice effect, and stop symbol notice effects are generated in the middle and lower right symbol display areas (that is, from the upper left). When the stop symbol advance notice effect is executed in all of the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas in the lower right L4 winning line and the player is in a state of notifying that a big hit symbol will be reached, the big hit will be confirmed. Therefore, the expectation level for the big hit can be increased as more symbols are divided when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 28 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 27 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, in response to the stop symbol notice pattern 21 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Many judgment values are assigned as compared to the established stop symbol notice pattern 22. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, after the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the upper left is started, the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed as in the stop symbol notice patterns 1 and 2 shown in FIG. On the other hand, there is a case where a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower left symbol display area. On the other hand, as shown in the stop symbol notice patterns 21 and 22 shown in FIG. There is a case where a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower symbol display area. Then, when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower left symbol display area as in the stop symbol notice patterns 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 45, it is foretold that the reach state is reached in the left column L1. It means to become a state. In addition, when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower right symbol display area as in the stop symbol notice patterns 21 and 22 shown in FIG. 46, it is notified that the reach state is reached from the upper left to the lower right L4. It means that it is in a state that has been.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38A, when a reach state is reached on the winning line in the left column L1, only a single reach state is obtained. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), when the reach state is in the diagonal winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4, the reach state is simultaneously reached in the diagonal winning line from the lower left to the upper right L5. It will reach a reach state. Therefore, as shown in the stop symbol notice patterns 21 and 22 shown in FIG. 46, if the reach state is predicted from the upper left to the lower right L4, the double reach state is predicted. It is equal to. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol image displayed as the stop symbol preview effect in the upper left symbol display area is split, is the destination of the split symbol image in the lower left symbol display area? Depending on whether it is the symbol display area in the lower right, it will be announced that it will be in a different reach state (in this example, whether it will be single reach or double reach), so the game will also move to the destination of the divided symbol image The attention of the player can be drawn and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, stop symbol notice effects that can be split sources, such as the stop symbol notice pattern 10 shown in FIG. 45 and the stop symbol notice patterns 30 and 31 shown in FIG. 46, are started at two places on the upper left and upper right. May be. Then, as shown in FIG. 45, when a reach state is reached in the left column L1 (that is, a single reach state is predicted), the symbol image in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. Only the stop symbol notice pattern 10 in the form of splitting is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the reach state is reached from the upper left to the lower right L4 (that is, the double reach state is predicted), the symbols in the upper left symbol display area. In addition to the stop symbol notification pattern 30 in a mode in which the image of FIG. 2 is split, a stop symbol notification pattern 31 in a mode in which the image of the symbol in the symbol display area on the upper right is split is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect that can be a split source is started in two places on the upper left and upper right, and the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split, the double reach state is set. You can expect to be. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect that can be a split source is started in two places, the upper left and the upper right, the image of the symbol in the upper left symbol display area is divided, or in the upper right symbol display area Depending on whether the image of the symbol is split, it will be predicted that the reach will be different (in this example, it will be single reach or double reach), so the player of the split symbol image will also move Attention can be drawn, and interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect that can be a split source is started at two places, the upper left and the upper right, and the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split, the double reach state is always required. However, even in the single reach state, the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area may be divided at a small rate. Even with such a configuration, when the symbol image in the symbol display area on the upper right is split, the player can be expected to be in a double reach state at a high rate.

  Also, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which it is predicted that different reach states will be made depending on whether the symbol image in the upper left symbol display area is split or the symbol image in the upper right symbol display area is split. However, for example, if the symbol image in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas is an odd symbol image or an even symbol image, and if the odd symbol image is split, the even symbol image is displayed. It may be configured so that a double reach state is more likely to be notified as compared with the case where the divides.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the L1 sudden probability variable big hit / small hit selected in step S1506 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the stop symbol warning pattern 0 and the stop symbol warning patterns 41 to 51 are set in the stop symbol warning pattern determination table for L1 sudden probability variation big hit / small hit. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 41 to 51 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 41 to 51 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 41 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 42 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 43 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin symbols are moved to the symbol display area at the lower left and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 44 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 45 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 46 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the left middle symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the middle stage effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 47 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 48 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 49 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area on the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, The effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, once the faded-out symbol “5” is changed to the symbol “3”, it is faded into the display screen again and moved to the symbol display area in the middle left. Thus, an effect in a manner similar to a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the middle left is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 50 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, two symbols “3” and “5” are displayed from the symbols lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. An effect of an aspect in which the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the left middle and lower left symbol display areas while performing the effect of an aspect that divides in the red form and displaying the variation display of the middle and lower stage effects. Is executed. The two symbols “3” and “5” may be divided into two at the same timing from the symbols displayed lightly in the symbol display area in the upper left, or may be divided with a slight time difference (for example, 1 second). May be.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 51 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the lower left symbol display area are started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) displayed in the final stop is displayed lightly while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper stage is started. In addition, at the same timing, in the lower left symbol display area, the effect symbol in which the final stop-displayed effect symbol (in this case, symbol “5”) is displayed lightly while performing the variable display of the lower effect symbol. To start.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop symbol notice effects are executed, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying different symbols may be executed. Therefore, not only does the stop symbol notice effect give a sense of expectation for the big hit, but also a sense of expectation that a sudden chance symbol design may be derived and displayed suddenly, and a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may become a pseudo-ream and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the stop symbol notice patterns 41 to 51 shown in FIG. 47 are used, a plurality of stop symbol notice effects for notifying the symbols constituting a part of the odd chance symbol design are executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the chance symbol may be derived and displayed and suddenly be a big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, in the case of suddenly probable big hit or small hit, relative to the stop symbol notice patterns 41 to 50 in which the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed relatively. On the other hand, more determination values are assigned than the stop symbol notice pattern 51 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the stop symbol notice effect is executed, but also when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears, compared to the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears. Thus, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that sudden chances will be derived and displayed and suddenly become probable big hits. It should be noted that the decision value allocation to the stop symbol notice pattern 51 is relatively increased, and the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears is more accurate than the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears. You may make it the expectation degree that a chance eye is derived | led-out displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit and becomes high.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, a stop that becomes a stop symbol advancement effect in the lower left symbol display area, as opposed to a stop symbol advancement pattern 44 that becomes a stop symbol advancement effect in the left middle symbol display area. Compared with the symbol notice pattern 41, more judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect in the division mode is executed and the stop symbol notice effect in the middle left symbol display area is generated, the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the lower left symbol display area. Compared with the case, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the chance of surprise is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit. It should be noted that the allocation of judgment values to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 41 is increased and the stop symbol advance notice effect in the lower left symbol display area occurs than the stop symbol advance notice effect in the middle left symbol display area. In addition, the degree of expectation that the chance of sudden chance is derived and displayed to suddenly become a probable big hit may be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the two symbols “3” and “5” are divided from the already-executed stop symbol notice effect only when suddenly probable big hit or small hit. A stop symbol notice pattern 50 for generating a stop symbol notice effect in the left middle and lower left symbol display areas is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the two symbols “3” and “5” are split from the already running stop symbol notice effect, and the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the left middle and lower left symbol display areas, respectively. In other words, when the stop symbol advance notice effect is executed in all the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas in the winning line in the left column L1, and it is in a state of notifying that there is an odd chance, the chance of surprise is (However, there are cases where both sudden and promising big hits and small hits occur). Therefore, when more symbols are divided when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed, it is possible to increase the expectation that the chance of chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, a symbol in red is used for a stop symbol warning pattern 48 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 47 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for a stop symbol notice pattern 41 in which a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is split in red, a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is split in blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 42, more judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the L4 sudden probability variable big hit / small hit selected in step S1508 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 61 to 71 are set in the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for the L4 sudden probability variation big hit / small hit. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 61 to 71 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 61 to 71 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 61 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 62 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 63 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbol is moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while performing the effect of the various aspects and displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the lower stage. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 64 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the inside symbol display area is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 65 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the inside symbol display area is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 66 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the middle symbol display area while the middle stage effect symbols are variably displayed and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 67 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 68 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 69 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is first displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, Once, the effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, once the faded-out symbol “5” is changed to the symbol “3”, it is faded into the display screen again and moved to the middle symbol display area. Thus, an effect in the form of a stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 70 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, two symbols “3” and “5” are displayed from the symbols lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. A mode of performing a mode of splitting in the red mode, and moving the divided and thin display symbols to the middle and lower right symbol display areas while performing variation display of the middle and lower stage design symbols Production is performed. The two symbols “3” and “5” may be divided into two at the same timing from the symbols displayed lightly in the symbol display area in the upper left, or may be divided with a slight time difference (for example, 1 second). May be.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 71 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. The stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and the stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the lower right are started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) displayed in the final stop is displayed lightly while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper stage is started. In addition, at the same timing, in the lower right symbol display area, the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “5”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the lower symbol effect symbol. Start production.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop symbol notice effects are executed, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying different symbols may be executed. Therefore, not only does the stop symbol notice effect give a sense of expectation for the big hit, but also a sense of expectation that a sudden chance symbol design may be derived and displayed suddenly, and a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may become a pseudo-ream and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the stop symbol notification patterns 61 to 71 shown in FIG. 48 are used, a plurality of stop symbol notification effects for notifying symbols constituting a part of the probability chance target symbol are executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the chance symbol may be derived and displayed and suddenly be a big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when suddenly probable big hit or small hit, suddenly, the stop symbol notice pattern 61 to 70 in which the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed is relatively performed. On the other hand, more determination values are assigned than the stop symbol notice pattern 71 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the stop symbol notice effect is executed, but also when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears, compared to the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears. Thus, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that sudden chances will be derived and displayed and suddenly become probable big hits. It should be noted that the allocation of judgment values to the stop symbol notice pattern 71 is relatively increased, and the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode appears is more accurate than the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode appears. You may make it the expectation degree that a chance eye is derived | led-out displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit and becomes high.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the stop symbol notice effect in the lower right symbol display area is the stop symbol notice pattern 64 that becomes the stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area. Compared with the stop symbol advance notice pattern 61, more judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed and a stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area occurs, the stop symbol notice effect in the lower right symbol display area is displayed. Compared with the case where it occurs, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that a chance of chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a big odd hit. When the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the middle symbol display area, the judgment value allocation to the stop symbol notice pattern 61 is increased and the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower right occurs. Rather, the degree of expectation that the chance of chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit may be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the two symbols “3” and “5” are divided from the stop symbol notice effect that is already being executed, only when suddenly probable big hit or small hit. A stop symbol notice pattern 70 for generating a stop symbol notice effect in the middle and lower right symbol display areas is provided. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the two symbols “3” and “5” are split from the already running stop symbol notice effect, and the stop symbol notice effect is generated in the middle and lower right symbol display areas, respectively. In the case (that is, when the stop symbol notice effect is executed in all of the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4, and it becomes a state in which it is informed that it will be a chance of chance), It will be decided that it will be an opportunity (but there are both sudden and promising big hits and small hits). Therefore, when more symbols are divided when the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed, it is possible to increase the expectation that the chance of chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 68 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 67 in which generation of a new stop symbol advance notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for the stop symbol notice pattern 61 in which the occurrence of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is produced after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 62, many judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the stop chance notice pattern determination table for the weak chance selected in step S1532 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, the stop symbol notification pattern 0 and the stop symbol notification patterns 81 to 85 are set in the stop symbol notification pattern determination table for weak chances. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1534, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1535. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1536, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 81 to 85 is selected in step S1534, it is determined in step S1535 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1536, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 81 to 85 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 81 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the right side is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 82 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the right side is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 83 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the middle right design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 84 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display symbol is moved to the right middle symbol display area. And like that, after showing the bag to be the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the middle right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 85 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the middle right design display area. And like that, after showing the bag to be the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the middle right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop symbol notice effects are executed, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying different symbols may be executed. Therefore, not only does the stop symbol notice effect give a sense of expectation for the big hit, but also a sense of expectation that a sudden chance symbol design may be derived and displayed suddenly, and a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may become a pseudo-ream and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the stop symbol notification patterns 81 to 85 shown in FIG. 49 are used, a plurality of stop symbol notification effects for notifying the symbols constituting a part of the pseudo-ream chance symbol symbol will be executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo-ream chance symbol may be temporarily stopped to become a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 85 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol advance notice pattern 84 in which generation of a new stop symbol advance notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, in response to the stop symbol notice pattern 81 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 82, many judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of weak chance symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, such as “weak 1”, “weak 2”, “weak 3”, etc., the same stopping is performed. Even when the symbol notice pattern is selected, the stop symbol notice effect is executed by switching to different process data according to the type of the weak chance eye symbol in step S8111 of the effect symbol changing process described later. For example, even when the same stop symbol notice pattern 81 is selected, when the weak chance symbol “weak 1” is selected, the weak chance symbol “weak 1” and the stop in step S8004 or step S8111 to be described later. When the process data corresponding to the symbol notice pattern 81 is selected or switched to become the weak chance symbol “weak 2”, the weak chance symbol “weak 2” and the stop symbol notice in step S8004 or step S8111 described later. Process data corresponding to the pattern 81 is selected or switched.

  Note that each stop symbol advance pattern shown in the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for pseudo continuous temporary stop shown in FIG. 49 is further subdivided to provide a stop symbol advance pattern for each type of weak chance symbol, so that a notice effect is provided. In step S1534 of the setting process, pseudo-successful stop symbol notice patterns that also consider pseudo-success chance symbols may be collectively determined. For example, the stop symbol notification pattern corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern 81 shown in FIG. 49 is further subdivided, and a stop symbol notification pattern corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern 81 for the weak chance target symbol “weak 1” or weak A stop symbol announcement pattern corresponding to the stop symbol announcement pattern 81 for the chance symbol “weak 2” may be prepared in advance.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the strong chance selected in step S1533 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, a stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and stop symbol advance notice patterns 91 to 95 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for the strong chance eye. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1534, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1535. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1536, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 91 to 95 is selected in step S1534, it is determined in step S1535 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1536, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 91 to 95 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 91 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the middle-lower symbol display area is performed, performing the variation | change display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 92 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the middle-lower symbol display area is performed, performing the variation | change display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 93 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red In this mode, the divided and thinly displayed symbols are moved to the middle and lower symbol display areas while displaying the variation symbols of the lower symbol, and displayed together with the “?” Indication. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 94 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the middle and lower symbol display areas while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. And, in that way, after making it appear as a stop symbol notice effect in the middle and lower symbol display area, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 95 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area in the middle of the right, while performing the change display of the lower stage effect symbols. And like that, after showing the bag to be the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the middle right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop symbol notice effects are executed, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying different symbols may be executed. Therefore, not only does the stop symbol notice effect give a sense of expectation for the big hit, but also a sense of expectation that a sudden chance symbol design may be derived and displayed suddenly, and a pseudo-continuous chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may become a pseudo-ream and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the stop symbol notice patterns 91 to 95 shown in FIG. 50 are used, a plurality of stop symbol notice effects for notifying the symbols constituting a part of the pseudo-continuous chance symbol design will be executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo-ream chance symbol may be temporarily stopped to become a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the symbols are displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 95 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 94 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for the stop symbol notice pattern 91 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is produced after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 92, many determination values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since there are multiple types of strong chance symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, such as “strong 1”, “strong 2”, “strong 3”, etc., the same stopping is performed. Even when the symbol notice pattern is selected, the stop symbol notice effect is executed by switching to different process data according to the type of the strong chance symbol in step S8111 of the effect symbol changing process described later. For example, even when the same stop symbol notice pattern 91 is selected, if the strong chance symbol “strong 1” is selected, the strong chance symbol “strong 1” and the stop in step S8004 or step S8111 to be described later. When the process data corresponding to the symbol advance notice pattern 91 is selected or switched to become the strong chance eye symbol “strong 2”, the strong chance eye symbol “strong 2” and the stop symbol advance notice in step S8004 or step S8111 described later. Process data corresponding to the pattern 91 is selected or switched.

  It should be noted that each stop symbol notice pattern shown in the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for pseudo-temporary temporary stop shown in FIG. 50 is further subdivided to provide a stop symbol notice pattern for each type of strong chance aim symbol. In step S1534 of the setting process, pseudo-successful stop symbol notice patterns that also consider pseudo-success chance symbols may be collectively determined. For example, the stop symbol notice pattern corresponding to the stop symbol notice pattern 91 shown in FIG. 50 is further subdivided, and a stop symbol notice pattern corresponding to the stop symbol notice pattern 91 for the strong chance aim symbol “strong 1”, A stop symbol announcement pattern corresponding to the stop symbol announcement pattern 91 for the chance symbol “strong 2” may be prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, after the stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the upper left is started, the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed as in the stop symbol notice patterns 81 and 82 shown in FIG. While the stop symbol notice effect in the right middle symbol display area may newly occur, the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed like the stop symbol notice patterns 91 and 92 shown in FIG. There is a case where a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the middle and lower symbol display areas. In this embodiment, when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the symbol display area in the middle right like the stop symbol notice patterns 81 and 82 shown in FIG. Means that it is in a state of being foretold. In addition, like the stop symbol notice patterns 91 and 92 shown in FIG. 50, when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the middle and lower symbol display areas, it is predicted that it will be a strong chance aim symbol. Is meant to be. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the image of the symbol displayed as the stop symbol notice effect in the upper left symbol display area is split, the destination of the split symbol image is the middle symbol display area. Depending on whether it is the middle or lower symbol display area, it will be announced that it will be a different pseudo-continuous chance symbol (in this example, it will be a weak chance symbol or a strong chance symbol), so a divided symbol It is possible to draw the player's attention to the destination of the image, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L1 reach deviation selected in step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 101 to 107 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for L1 reach deviation. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 101 to 107 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 101 to 107 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 101 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the variation display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 102 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the variation display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 103 is selected, in the effect symbol change display, before the effect symbol change display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The display of the lower stage design is performed while the divided display design is moved to the lower left design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 104 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 105 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the display of the lower stage, the divided display symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while performing the variable display of the lower stage effect symbols. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 106 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect currently being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 107 is selected, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area at the same timing before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol variation display. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the lower left symbol display area are started. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while displaying the variation of the upper-stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly is started, and at the same timing, In the symbol display area, while the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage is being performed, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (in this case, the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper left) is displayed lightly is started.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the symbol is out of reach, the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is relatively different from the case of the big hit (see FIG. 45). A certain number of determination values are also assigned to the stop symbol notice pattern 107 to be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 105 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 104 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for the stop symbol notice pattern 101 in which a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 102, more judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the judgment value allocation to the stop symbol warning pattern 101 in the mode that splits the symbol in the red mode is less than the stop symbol warning pattern 102 in the mode that splits the symbol in the blue mode. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when the symbol is split in red, and to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Next, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for L4 reach deviation selected in step S1512 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, a stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and stop symbol advance notice patterns 111 to 117 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for L4 reach deviation. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 111 to 117 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 111 to 117 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 111 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 112 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 113 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red In this mode, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 114 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 115 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 116 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is first displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect currently being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 117 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area on the upper right is started while the stop symbol notice effect for notifying is started. That is, the stop symbol notice effect is started in two symbol display areas simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper-stage effect symbols, while performing the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed last stop is displayed lightly, Then, the effect is performed in such a manner that the effect symbol displayed at the final stop is displayed lightly. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left and upper right symbol display areas continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper right symbol display area is split in red. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 118 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. The stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and the stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the lower right are started. In this case, for example, in the upper-left symbol display area, while displaying the variation of the upper-stage effect symbol, the effect of a mode in which the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is started thinly, and at the same timing, the lower right In the symbol display area, the effect design is started such that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (in this case, the same symbol as the symbol display area in the upper left) is displayed lightly while the lower effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, when the symbol is out of reach, the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode is relatively different from the case of the big hit (see FIG. 46). A certain number of determination values are also assigned to the stop symbol notice pattern 118 to be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol notification pattern 115 in which generation of a new stop symbol notification effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 114 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, for the stop symbol notice pattern 111 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is produced after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 112, a lot of judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the distribution of the judgment value to the stop symbol notice pattern 111 in the aspect in which the symbol is divided in the red form is reduced with respect to the stop symbol notice pattern 112 in the form in which the symbol is divided in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when the symbol is split in red, and to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In this embodiment, after the stop symbol notice effect in the upper left symbol display area is started, the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed like the stop symbol notice patterns 101 and 102 shown in FIG. On the other hand, there is a case where a stop symbol announcement effect is newly generated in the lower left symbol display area. On the other hand, as shown in the stop symbol announcement patterns 111 and 112 shown in FIG. There is a case where a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower symbol display area. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol image displayed as the stop symbol preview effect in the upper left symbol display area is split, is the destination of the split symbol image in the lower left symbol display area? Depending on whether it is the symbol display area in the lower right, it will be announced that it will be in a different reach state (in this example, whether it will be single reach or double reach), so the game will also move to the destination of the divided symbol image The attention of the player can be drawn and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, stop symbol notice effects that can be split sources, such as the stop symbol notice pattern 106 shown in FIG. 51 and the stop symbol notice patterns 116 and 117 shown in FIG. May be. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, when a reach state is reached in the left column L1 (that is, a single reach state is predicted), a symbol image in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. Only the stop symbol notice pattern 106 in the form of splitting is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, in a state in which it is predicted that the reach state is reached from the upper left to the lower right L4 (that is, the double reach state is reached), the symbols in the upper left symbol display area. In addition to the stop symbol notice pattern 116 in a mode in which the image of FIG. 2 is split, a stop symbol notice pattern 117 in a mode in which the symbol image in the symbol display area on the upper right is split is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice effect that can be a split source is started in two places, the upper left and the upper right, the image of the symbol in the upper left symbol display area is divided, or in the upper right symbol display area Depending on whether the image of the symbol is split, it will be predicted that the reach will be different (in this example, it will be single reach or double reach), so the player of the split symbol image will also move Attention can be drawn, and interest in games can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol in the upper part of L1 selected in step S1514 will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 121 to 126 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol in the upper part of L1. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 121 to 126 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 121 to 126 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 121 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 122 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state in which the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the divided | segmented thin display symbol to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the fluctuation display of the middle stage effect symbol.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 123 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the left middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 124 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left is first displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 125 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the display of the lower stage, the divided display symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while performing the variable display of the lower stage effect symbols. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 126 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area on the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, The effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, the fading-out symbol is faded into the display screen again and moved to the middle left symbol display area, and the heel stops in the middle left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which became the symbol notice effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the judgment value allocation to the stop symbol notice pattern 121 in the aspect that divides the symbol in the red aspect is less than that in the stop symbol notice pattern 122 in the aspect that divides the symbol in the blue aspect. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when the symbol is split in red, and to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing the same symbol on L4 selected in step S1516 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, the stop symbol advance pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance patterns 131 to 136 are set in the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for losing the same symbol in the upper part of L4. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 131 to 136 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 131 to 136 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 131 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of a middle is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 132 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of a middle is performed, performing the fluctuation | variation display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 133 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 134 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 135 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 136 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified starts. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, Once, the effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, the fading-out symbols that are faded out once again fade in the display screen, moved to the middle symbol display area, and stopped in the middle symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which became the symbol notice effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the distribution of the judgment value to the stop symbol notice pattern 131 in the aspect that divides the symbol in the red form is less than the stop symbol notice pattern 132 in the form that divides the pattern in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when the symbol is split in red, and to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “5” in L1 up and down selected in step S1518 will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 141 to 146 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for the deviation of L1 up and down “1” and “5”. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 141 to 146 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 141 to 146 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 141 is selected, in the effect symbol change display, before the effect symbol change display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 142 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 143 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin symbols are moved to the symbol display area at the lower left and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 144 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 145 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 146 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. A stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the lower left symbol display area are started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) displayed in the final stop is displayed lightly while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper stage is started. In addition, at the same timing, in the lower left symbol display area, the effect symbol in which the final stop-displayed effect symbol (in this case, symbol “5”) is displayed lightly while performing the variable display of the lower effect symbol. To start.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the left and right are “1” and “5”, the symbols are out of sync with each other as compared to the big win (see FIG. 45). A certain number of determination values are also assigned to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 146 in which the start form stop symbol advance notice effect is executed.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 145 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol notice pattern 144 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, in response to the stop symbol notice pattern 141 in which generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in red, a new stop symbol notice effect is generated after the symbol is divided in blue form. Compared with the established stop symbol notice pattern 142, many determination values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 55, the distribution of the judgment value to the stop symbol notice pattern 141 in the aspect in which the symbol is divided in the red form is reduced with respect to the stop symbol notice pattern 142 in the form in which the symbol is divided in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation (reliability) that the symbol becomes a random chance symbol when the symbol is split in a red manner, and it is possible that the random chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “5” in L4 up and down selected in step S1520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 151 to 156 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing L4 up and down “1” and “5”. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 151 to 156 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 151 to 156 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 151 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 152 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the lower right is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a lower stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 153 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbol is moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while performing the effect of the various aspects and displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the lower stage. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 154 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 155 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 156 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed. The stop symbol notice effect for notifying the symbol and the stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the lower right are started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) displayed in the final stop is displayed lightly while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper stage is started. In addition, at the same timing, in the lower right symbol display area, the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “5”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the lower symbol effect symbol. Start production.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when the left and right are “1” and “5”, the symbols are out of sync with each other when compared to the big win (see FIG. 46). A certain number of determination values are also assigned to the stop symbol notice pattern 156 in which the stop symbol notice effect of the start mode is executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the symbol is displayed in red for the stop symbol warning pattern 155 in which generation of a new stop symbol warning effect is not established after the symbol is split in blue. Compared with the stop symbol advance notice pattern 154 in which generation of a new stop symbol advance notice effect is not established after the division, many determination values are assigned. On the other hand, in response to the stop symbol notice pattern 151 in which the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect is established after the symbol is divided in the red form, a new stop symbol notice effect is produced after the symbol is divided in the blue form. Compared to the established stop symbol notice pattern 152, more judgment values are assigned. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the symbol is split in the red mode, it is possible to expect that there is a high possibility that a new stop symbol notice effect will be established. When the game is divided, it is possible to give the player a fear that the generation of a new stop symbol notice effect may end in failure, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56, the determination value allocation to the stop symbol notice pattern 151 in the aspect that divides the symbol in the red form is less than that in the stop symbol notice pattern 152 in the form that divides the figure in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation (reliability) that the symbol becomes a random chance symbol when the symbol is split in a red manner, and it is possible that the random chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L1 selected in step S1522 will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 161 to 166 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L1. . Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 161 to 166 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 161 to 166 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 161 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 162 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the symbol display area of the left is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of the middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 163 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the left middle symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the middle stage effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 164 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 165 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 166 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area on the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, The effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, once the faded-out symbol “5” is changed to the symbol “3”, it is faded into the display screen again and moved to the symbol display area in the middle left. Thus, an effect in a manner similar to a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the middle left is executed.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 57, the distribution of the judgment value to the stop symbol notice pattern 161 in the aspect in which the symbol is divided in the red form is reduced with respect to the stop symbol notice pattern 162 in the form in which the symbol is divided in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation (reliability) that the symbol becomes a random chance symbol when the symbol is split in a red manner, and it is possible that the random chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L4 selected in step S1524 will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and the stop symbol advance notice patterns 171 to 176 are set in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for losing “1” and “3” in L4. . Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 171 to 176 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 171 to 176 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the change display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 171 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the inside symbol display area is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 172 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The effect of the aspect which moves the symbol of the thin display divided | segmented to the inside symbol display area is performed, performing the effect of a mode and performing the variable display of the effect symbol of a middle stage.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 173 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the middle symbol display area while the middle stage effect symbols are variably displayed and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 174 is selected, in the effect symbol change display, before the effect symbol change display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 175 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 176 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, Once, the effect of the aspect that the division of the stop symbol notice effect is not established is executed. After that, once the faded-out symbol “5” is changed to the symbol “3”, it is faded into the display screen again and moved to the middle symbol display area. Thus, an effect in the form of a stop symbol notice effect in the middle symbol display area is executed.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 58, the distribution of the judgment value to the stop symbol notice pattern 171 in the aspect in which the symbol is divided in the red form is reduced with respect to the stop symbol notice pattern 172 in the form in which the symbol is divided in the blue form. It may be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation (reliability) that the symbol becomes a random chance symbol when the symbol is split in a red manner, and it is possible that the random chance is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a probable big hit. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  Next, the other stop symbol notice pattern determination table selected in step S1525 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, a stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 and stop symbol advance notice patterns 181 to 196 are set in the other stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table. Among these, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicates that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed. If the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 is selected in step S1526, the stop symbol advance notice effect must be executed in step S1527. It is determined, the process does not proceed to step S1528, and the stop symbol advance execution flag is not set. On the other hand, if any of the stop symbol notification patterns 181 to 196 is selected in step S1526, it is determined in step S1527 that the stop symbol notification effect is executed, and in step S1528, the stop symbol notification execution flag corresponding to the stop symbol notification pattern is determined. Is set.

  The stop symbol advance notice patterns 181 to 196 are stop symbol advance notice patterns for executing the stop symbol advance notice effect during the variation display of the effect symbols in the following manner.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 181 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The display of the lower stage design is performed while the divided display design is moved to the lower left design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 182 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is first displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red In this mode, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 183 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the left middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 184 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While the middle stage stage design is displayed in a variable manner, the divided thin display design is moved to the middle design display area and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 185 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red The effect of the above is performed, and the divided display symbols are moved to the symbol display area on the lower left while performing the variable display of the effect symbols in the lower stage. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 186 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in the state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in red While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 187 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the display of the lower stage, the divided display symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while performing the variable display of the lower stage effect symbols. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 188 is selected, in the variation display of the production symbol, before the variation display result of the production symbol is derived and displayed, first, the production symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, the effect in such a manner that the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Next, in a state where the execution of the stop symbol notice effect that is being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the same symbol as the symbol that is lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area is split in blue While performing the effect of the above, and performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the lower stage, the divided and thinly displayed symbol is moved to the symbol display area in the lower right. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 189 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin symbols are moved to the symbol display area at the lower left and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 190 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbol is moved to the lower right symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while performing the effect of the various aspects and displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the lower stage. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 191 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In such a mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the left middle symbol display area and displayed together with the “?” Indication while the middle stage effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 192 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “3” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this mode, the divided thin display symbols are moved to the middle symbol display area while the middle stage effect symbols are variably displayed and displayed together with the “?” Display. A notice effect is executed.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 193 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area at the upper left is first displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 194 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in red from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 195 is selected, in the variation display of the effect symbol, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the upper left symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided thin symbols are moved to the lower left symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, after making it appear as if it is a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area in the lower left, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol is performed outside the display screen, and stopped An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  When the stop symbol notice pattern 196 is selected, in the effect symbol variation display, before the effect symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, first, the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display area in the upper left is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect to be notified is started. In this case, for example, in the upper left symbol display area, while performing the variation display of the upper stage effect symbol, the effect of the aspect in which the effect symbol (in this case, the symbol “1”) that is finally stopped is displayed lightly is executed. To do. Next, while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the symbol “5” is split in blue from the symbol lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. In this manner, the divided and thin display symbols are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower symbols are displayed in a variable manner. And like that, after showing the bag to be a stop symbol notice effect in the symbol display area at the lower right, the effect of fading out the divided thin display symbol to the outside of the display screen, An effect is performed in such a way that the division of the stop symbol notice effect ends in failure.

  In this embodiment, by executing steps S1526 and S1534 of the notice effect setting process using the stop symbol notice pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Although the case where the notice pattern is determined collectively by one lottery process using random numbers is shown, whether or not the stop symbol notice effect is executed and the stop symbol notice pattern are decided by separate lottery processes. Also good. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a lottery process based on a random number for determining the stop symbol advance notice effect and determines whether or not to execute the stop symbol advance effect. If it is decided to execute the stop symbol announcement effect, the stop symbol announcement pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 59 is selected, and the lottery process is executed based on the stop symbol announcement pattern determination random number. Thus, the stop symbol notice pattern may be determined. In this case, in the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 59, the stop symbol advance notice pattern 0 indicating that the stop symbol advance notice effect is not executed becomes unnecessary.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  If the process data corresponding to the stop symbol notice effect is selected in step S8004, step S8105 is executed, and the stop symbol notice effect is executed while the effect symbol is being displayed. Further, when the pseudo-ream is executed, when the process data is switched to the stop symbol advancement effect in step S8111 to be described later, step S8105 is executed, so that the pseudo-reams with the stop symbol advancement effect are performed. Re-variation (including final variation) is performed. If it is decided not to execute the stop symbol notice effect in the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous, the process data is switched to the process data without the stop symbol notice effect in step S8112 described later, and step S8105 is executed. Normal re-variation (including final variation) without stop symbol notice effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is a case where a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream is received (step S8106). If the pseudo-ream is executed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol is reached (step S8107). Specifically, whether or not it is a temporary stop timing can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the temporary stop timing, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the temporary stop symbol (pseudo consecutive chance symbol) determined in step S8002 according to the number of temporary stop timings during the variable display. (Step S8108).

  If it is not the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the timing of re-variation after the temporary stop (step S8109). Whether or not it is the timing of re-variation can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variation time timer. If it is the timing of re-variation, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the current re-variation is set (step S8110). For example, the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of temporary stops each time a temporary stop symbol is displayed in a temporary stop manner when executing a variable display of the effect symbols accompanied by pseudo-continuations. In this embodiment, as already described, since the stop symbol advance execution flag that can specify the number of temporary stops and the stop symbol advance notice pattern is set in step S1536 of the notice effect setting processing, the current number of temporary stops is set. It may be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to is set.

  If the stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the current re-variation is set, the production control CPU 101 determines that the stop symbol advance pattern specified by the stop symbol advance execution flag and the current re-change are not the final change and Next, the process data is switched to process data accompanied by a stop symbol notice effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous chance symbol displayed temporarily (step S8111). If the current re-variation is the final variation, the effect control CPU 101 performs a re-variation process accompanied by the stop symbol notification pattern specified by the stop symbol notification execution flag and the stop symbol notification effect according to the final stop symbol. Switch to data.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol advance execution flag corresponding to the current re-change is not set, the effect control CPU 101 switches to normal re-variation process data not accompanied by the stop symbol advance effect (step S8112).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 restarts the process timer (step S8113).

  Note that, when the pseudo-ream is executed during the effect symbol variation display, first, the initial variation is performed by executing step S8105 according to the process data selected in step S8004 of the effect symbol variation start process. . Then, the pseudo-ream chance symbol is temporarily displayed (see step S8108). Every time re-variation is started, the process data is switched in steps S8111 and S8112, and step S8105 is executed according to the process data after switching. As a result, each re-variation (including the final variation) is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the pseudo-ream is executed, with regard to the final change, the presence / absence of the stop symbol / notice effect and the stop symbol / notice pattern are determined by executing steps S1501 to S1528 of the notice effect setting process. For the re-change from the first change to the last change, the steps S1529 to S1537 of the notice effect setting process are executed, so that the presence / absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern are determined for each change. It is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the stop symbol notification effect is not necessarily executed for every re-variation, and the stop symbol notification effect may be executed intermittently. is there. For example, after the stop symbol notice effect is performed with the first fluctuation, the stop symbol notice effect may not appear with the first re-variation, and the stop symbol notice effect may appear with the second re-variation. In addition, even if the stop symbol notice effect is executed at the time of the first change or re-change in the middle, the stop symbol notice effect may not be executed in the final change.

  It should be noted that in the case of executing fluctuation display with pseudo-continuations, when executing the stop symbol advance notice effect, the stop symbol advance notice effect may always be executed with the initial change and all re-changes.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8114), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8115).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S878. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S871 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the stop symbol of the effect symbols in steps S872 to S873 is displayed. The process proceeds to step S877 without repeatedly executing the process.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S872). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  If neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed at step S872 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S873), the presentation control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S874). . For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. If it is set, the stop symbol notice execution flag is reset. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 33, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S875).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed in step S872 (Y in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and confirms whether the fanfare flag is set. (Step S877). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S877), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S879), and starts a process timer (step S880). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S881). However, if it is a small hit, it is not a big hit, so the effect during the big hit from the big hit display process (step S804) to the big hit end effect process (step S807) is not executed, but set in step S879. It is preferable that an effect corresponding to the small hit game is executed over a predetermined effect period in accordance with the process data, and the process returns to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S800.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening open display command has been received is set (that is, the big winning opening at the start of round 1). Whether or not a display command during opening has been received is confirmed (step S901). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc.) in accordance with the contents of the process data n (step S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot symbol and performs an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S907), and the contents of the special winning opening open display command are displayed. Based on this, process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S908). Then, the process timer is started (step S909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S910).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game (step S971). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the big hit game have been completed, for example, during production during round (see step S805) or post-round processing (see step S806). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the production period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27 etc.) is executed (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the effect period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S979). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. If it is set, the stop symbol notice execution flag is reset. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S979).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the stop symbol notice effect will be described. FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the production mode of the stop symbol notice effect. 64 and 65, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 64, a specific example of the production mode of the stop symbol notice effect in the case of reaching will be described. When receiving the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the final stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the display result command when the variation display is started (see step S8002). In this case, in the example shown in FIGS. 64 (1), (2), (3), and (4), the normal big hit symbol on the winning line in the left column L1 is based on the reception of the display result 2 designation command that designates the normal big hit. Based on the fact that the combination of symbols including “666” is determined or the display result 1 designation command for designating the deviation is received, the combination of symbols that will be out of reach with the reach symbol “6” in the winning line of the left column L1. It shall be decided.

  Also, a notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display to determine whether or not to execute a stop symbol notice effect and a stop symbol notice pattern (see step S8003). In the example shown in FIGS. 64 (1), (2), (3), and (4), the stop symbol for L1 normal / probability variable big hit is based on the winning line in the left column L1 determined as a normal big hit symbol or a reach off symbol. A pattern determination table or a stop symbol advance pattern determination table for losing L1 reach is selected (see steps S1502 and S1510), and an L1 normal / probability variable big hit stop symbol advance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 or the L1 reach shown in FIG. Assume that the stop symbol advance notice pattern 1 or the stop symbol advance notice pattern 101 is determined from the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table (see step S1526).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern 1 or stop symbol notice pattern 101 (see step S8004), and as shown in FIG. On the display screen 9, the effect symbol variation display is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), in the upper-left symbol display area, the stop symbol warning effect is displayed in such a manner that the effect symbol 200 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Is started (see step S8105).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 64 (2) and 64 (3), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area. The effect is such that the same symbol 201 as the existing symbol 200 is split in a red manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), after performing the effect in such a manner that the symbol 200 that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect in such a manner that the same symbol 201 as the symbol 200 is split is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the divided display 201 is moved to the lower left symbol display area and the stop symbol in the lower left symbol display area is displayed while the lower stage effect symbol is displayed. A new notice effect is generated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (4), when it comes to the stop timing of the upper stage design symbol, the final stop symbol of the upper stage design symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper display unit. Then, the final stop symbol of the lower stage design symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower display unit. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (4), a reach state (single reach state) is reached with the reach symbol “6” in the winning line of the left column L1.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 64 (1), (2), (5), and (6), the normal big hit is made on the pay line from the upper left to the lower right L4 based on the reception of the display result 2 designation command for designating the normal big win. Based on receiving the display result 1 designation command for determining the combination of symbols including the symbol “666” or designating the deviation, the symbol that the reach symbol is “6” on the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4 and the reach is shifted. It is assumed that the combination of is determined. In this case, at the same time, the combination of symbols that reach at least the reach symbol “7” in the winning line from the lower left to the upper right L5 is determined.

  Also, a notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display to determine whether or not to execute a stop symbol notice effect and a stop symbol notice pattern (see step S8003). In the example shown in FIGS. 64 (1), (2), (5), and (6), the stop for the L4 normal / probability variable big hit is based on the fact that the winning pattern from the upper left to the lower right L4 is determined as the normal big hit symbol or the reach off symbol. A symbol advance notice pattern determination table or a stop symbol advance pattern determination table for L4 reach deviation is selected (see steps S1504 and S1512), and a stop symbol advance pattern determination table for L4 normal / probability variable big hit shown in FIG. 46 or shown in FIG. It is assumed that the stop symbol advance notice pattern 21 or the stop symbol advance notice pattern 111 is determined from the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table for L4 reach deviation (see step S1526).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern 21 or the stop symbol notice pattern 111 (see step S8004), and as shown in FIG. On the display screen 9, the effect symbol variation display is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), in the upper-left symbol display area, the stop symbol warning effect is displayed in such a manner that the effect symbol 200 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variable display of the effect symbol in the upper stage. Is started (see step S8105).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 64 (2) and 64 (5), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area. The effect is such that the same symbol 201 as the existing symbol 200 is split in a red manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), after performing the effect in such a manner that the symbol 200 that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect in such a manner that the same symbol 201 as the symbol 200 is split is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (5), the divided and thinly displayed symbols 201 are moved to the lower right symbol display area while the lower stage effect symbols are being displayed in the lower right symbol display area. A stop symbol notice effect is newly generated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (6), when it comes to the stop timing of the upper stage design symbol, the final stop symbol of the upper stage design symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper display unit, and further, the stop timing of the lower stage design symbol and Then, the final stop symbol of the lower stage design symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower display unit. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (6), the reach state is “6” in the winning line from the upper left to the lower right L4, and the reach state is “7” in the winning line from the lower left to the upper right L5. Double reach state).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a specific example of the production mode of the stop symbol notice effect when the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is displayed temporarily stopped will be described. When receiving the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the final stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the display result command when the variation display is started (see step S8002). In addition, fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuations (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command designating the super PA 3-5 and special PG1-3), the pseudo-continuous chance symbol to be temporarily stopped after the first fluctuation is also determined (see step S8002). In the example shown in FIGS. 65 (1), (2), (3), and (4), it has been decided to temporarily stop and display a weak chance eye symbol including the common symbol “6” as the first-variation pseudo-continuous chance eye symbol. And In the following, the case where the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the temporary variation symbol of the first variation will be described. However, the same applies to the case where the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the second variation.

  Also, a notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display to determine whether or not to execute a stop symbol notice effect and a stop symbol notice pattern (see step S8003). In the example shown in FIGS. 65 (1), (2), (3), and (4), the stop symbol advance pattern determination table for the weak chance eye is selected based on the determination of the weak chance eye symbol (see step S1532). Assume that the stop symbol notice pattern 81 is determined from the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for weak chances shown in FIG. 49 (see step S1534).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 first selects a process table corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 81 determined for the first variation (see step S8004), and as shown in FIG. In the display screen, the display of the variation of the effect design is started.

  Next, during the first variation, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), in the upper left symbol display area, the effect symbol 200 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the upper effect symbol. The stop symbol notice effect is started (see step S8105).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 65 (2) and 65 (3), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area. The effect is such that the same symbol 201 as the existing symbol 200 is split in a red manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), after performing an effect such that the symbol 200 that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect in such a manner that the same symbol 201 as the symbol 200 is split is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), while the middle stage effect symbol is displayed, the divided thin display symbol 201 is moved to the right middle symbol display area, and in the right middle symbol display area. A stop symbol notice effect is newly generated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), at the temporary stop display timing of the effect symbol, the weak chance symbol including the common symbol “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 65 (1), (2), (5), and (6), the strong chance symbol including the common symbol “6” as the pseudo-variable chance symbol of the first change is determined to be temporarily stopped. Shall be.

  Also, a notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display to determine whether or not to execute a stop symbol notice effect and a stop symbol notice pattern (see step S8003). In the example shown in FIGS. 65 (1), (2), (5), and (6), the stop symbol advancement pattern determination table for strong chance eyes is selected based on the determination of the strong chance eye symbols (see step S1533). It is assumed that the stop symbol notice pattern 91 is determined from the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the strong chance eye shown in FIG. 50 (see step S1534).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 first selects a process table corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice pattern 91 determined for the initial variation (see step S8004), and as shown in FIG. In the display screen, the display of the variation of the effect design is started.

  Next, during the first variation, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), in the upper left symbol display area, the effect symbol 200 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly while performing the variation display of the upper effect symbol. The stop symbol notice effect is started (see step S8105).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 65 (2) and 65 (5), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area. The effect is such that the same symbol 201 as the existing symbol 200 is split in a red manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), after performing an effect such that the symbol 200 that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect in such a manner that the same symbol 201 as the symbol 200 is split is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (5), the divided and thinly displayed symbols 201 are moved to the middle and lower symbol display areas while performing the variable display of the lower stage effect symbols. A stop symbol notice effect is newly generated.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (6), when the temporary stop display timing of the effect symbol comes, a strong chance symbol including the common symbol “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, as an example, the case where the stop symbol notice effect is executed using the stop symbol notice patterns 1, 21, 81, 91, 101, 111 is shown. When the symbol notice pattern is determined, the stop symbol notice effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the decided stop symbol notice pattern.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the final stop symbol or temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol derived and displayed on the predetermined display unit among the plurality of display units in the effect display device 9 The stop symbol notice effect that is notified before being derived and displayed on the display unit is executed. In this case, first, by displaying the symbol image on the upper display portion of the plurality of display portions, the effect symbol derived and displayed on the upper display portion (in this example, the upper left symbol display area) is notified in advance. The stop symbol notice effect is started. Next, after a new symbol image appears at the display position of the symbol image in the upper left symbol display area, the symbol image newly appeared from the display position is moved to the middle or lower display, The stop symbol notice effect for notifying the effect symbols derived and displayed on the middle and lower display units is executed. Then, the display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 becomes different depending on which winning line in the middle or lower display part the symbol image is moved (in this example, Whether or not a single reach state or a double reach state is reached, or whether a weak chance symbol or a strong chance symbol is determined). Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects such that the stop symbol notice effect is derived in the other symbol display area after the stop symbol notice effect is first started. Therefore, even during the period from the start of the stop symbol notice effect until the effect symbol in the notice target symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and improve the interest in the game. Can be made. In addition, since it is announced that the display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 will be different depending on the destination of the symbol image, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the destination of the image. , Can improve the interest in games.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the reach effect is a single reach state that reaches a reach state on one pay line, and the double reach state that is a reach state on a plurality of (two in this example) pay lines. Reach production can be performed. Then, the display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is informed of the single reach state or the double reach state according to which winning line on the display unit in the lower stage is moved. For this reason, it is predicted that a single reach state or a double reach state will be entered depending on the destination of the symbol image, so that the player can be drawn to the destination of the symbol image, and the interest in the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to temporarily stop and display the weak chance symbol and the strong chance symbol in the pseudo-ream, and when the strong chance symbol is temporarily stopped, the weak chance symbol is temporarily stopped. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than the displayed case. Then, the display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 becomes a weak chance symbol or a strong chance symbol depending on which winning line is moved on the winning line in the middle or lower display unit. Notice. For this reason, it is foretold that it will be a weak chance symbol or a strong chance symbol depending on the destination of the symbol image, so that the player can be drawn to the destination of the image, and the interest in the game will be enhanced. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case of executing the notice of the weak chance symbol and the strong chance symbol as the pseudo-continuous chance symbol is shown. However, by executing the stop symbol announcement effect, In such a case, it may be configured such that a notice of a weak chance symbol and a strong chance symbol are executed as the chance of chance symbols that are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, if the probability suddenly becomes a big hit, the strong chance symbol is finally stopped and displayed at a high rate, and if it is a small hit, the weak chance symbol is finally stopped and displayed at a high rate. Good. For example, in step S8002 of the effect symbol variation start process, when suddenly probable big hit, a table similar to FIG. 40 (A) is selected, and when small hit, a table similar to FIG. 40 (B) is selected. Select a strong chance target symbol as a stop symbol of the production symbol at a high rate when suddenly a probable big hit, and select a weak chance target symbol as a stop symbol of the production symbol at a high rate when small hit It may be determined. Then, in the notice effect setting processing in step S8003, if the weak chance eye symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol notice pattern determination table for the weak chance eye similar to FIG. 49 is selected, and the strong chance eye symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, a stop symbol notice pattern determination table for weak chances similar to that shown in FIG. 50 may be selected to determine the presence or absence of the stop symbol notice effect and the stop symbol notice pattern. Further, in this case, after the big hit game or the small hit game based on the probability variation big hit is suddenly ended, a common production (so-called latent production) in a mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the probability variation state is made may be executed ( For example, the variable display is executed with a background pattern of a common background color (for example, yellow) regardless of whether or not the state is a probability variation state). If constituted in this way, if it is foretold that it will become a strong chance eye symbol by the stop symbol announcement effect, it is possible to raise the expectation for the player to shift to the probable change state.

  In addition, for example, in the variable display before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, it is possible to execute the pre-read notice effect by pre-determining whether or not it will be a big hit or reach in advance. In the configured gaming machine, as a pre-reading notice effect, an effect of a mode in which the chance aim symbol is stopped and displayed in one or a plurality of variable displays is executed. You may comprise so that it may notify that a strong chance eye symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, when the change display subject to notice becomes a big hit, the strong chance symbol is stopped and displayed at a high ratio, and when the change display subject to notice is out of proportion, the ratio of the weak chance target symbol is high. May be stopped and displayed. If constituted in this way, if it is foretold that it will be a strong chance aim symbol by the stop symbol notice effect during the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect is started by displaying the symbol image on the first pay line (in this example, the symbol display area at the upper left) in the upper display unit, The stop symbol notice effect is started by displaying a symbol image on a second winning line (in this example, an upper right symbol display area) different from the first winning line in the upper display unit. The display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 differs depending on whether a new symbol image appears in the upper left symbol display area or a new symbol image appears in the upper right symbol display area. The display state is notified (in this example, whether or not a single reach state or a double reach state is set). Therefore, depending on whether a new symbol image appears in the upper left symbol display area or a symbol image appears in the upper right symbol display area, the display state of the display screen of the effect display device 9 differs. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the movement source of the symbol image, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, whether or not a single reach state or a double reach state is established depending on whether a new symbol image appears in the upper left symbol display area or a symbol image appears in the upper right symbol display area. However, it may be configured so as to notify whether or not a weak chance symbol symbol or a strong chance symbol symbol is determined according to the movement source (division source) of the symbol image.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the symbol image is split from the symbol display area on either the upper left or the upper right is explained, but the symbol image is split from both the symbol display areas on the upper left and the upper right, respectively. You may comprise so that a new stop symbol notice effect may generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, it is possible to give notice of an effect symbol different from the effect symbol to be notified by the stop symbol notice effect on the left display unit by the stop symbol notice effect on the middle or lower display part. Also, in this case, the effect symbol that is notified by the stop symbol notice effect on the left display part and the effect symbol that is notified by the stop symbol notice effect on the middle or lower display part form part of the so-called chance eye symbol. ing. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a combination of effect symbols other than the normal jackpot symbol or the probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, a chance of success chance symbol or a pseudo-chance chance symbol) can be notified in advance, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the advance notice after the appearance of a new design image, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the effect symbol to be notified by the stop symbol notice effect on the left display unit and the effect symbol to be notified by the stop symbol notice effect on the middle or lower display part are temporarily stopped in a pseudo-continuous manner. A part of the displayed pseudo-ream chance symbol may be formed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the re-variation in the quasi-continuation will continue, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the effect symbol that is notified in the stop symbol notice effect in the left display part and the effect symbol that is notified in the stop symbol notice effect in the middle or lower display part are May form part. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a sudden chance symbol symbol is derived and displayed and suddenly becomes a promising big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, according to this embodiment, after a new symbol image appears at the display position of the symbol image on the left display unit, it is not established when the stop symbol notice effect is established on the lower display unit. There are cases. Therefore, after the symbol displayed as the stop symbol notice effect on the left display section is divided, a case where a new stop symbol notice effect is established and a case where it is not established can be provided. In the period until the effect symbol in the display area is stopped and displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect more.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the occurrence of the stop symbol notice effect in the lower display unit is not established, the stop symbol notice effect in the middle display unit is generated and the occurrence of the stop symbol notice effect is restored. It is possible to produce an effect as if it were. Therefore, after showing that the occurrence of the stop symbol notice effect in the lower display unit will not be realized, it will develop into a stop symbol notice performance in the middle display unit, so the game's interest will be further improved by an unexpected effect be able to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in accordance with the appearance mode of either the red mode or the blue mode, a new design image appears at the display position of the design image on the upper display unit, and the appearance of the design image appears. The generation of the stop symbol notice effect in the lower display unit is established or not established at a different rate depending on the mode. Therefore, the proportion of occurrence of the stop symbol notice effect in the lower display unit can be varied depending on the appearance mode of the split symbol image, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, by displaying the symbol image on the lower display unit at the same timing as the start timing of the stop symbol notification effect on the upper display unit, the stop symbol notification on the lower display unit is performed. It is possible to execute the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode for starting the effect. Then, the stop pattern notice effect of the split mode and the stop symbol notice effect of the simultaneous start mode are executed at different ratios depending on whether or not the jackpot, the chance of winning chance symbol, or the pseudo consecutive chance symbol symbol is used. Therefore, the expectation to be a big hit, a chance of success symbol, or a pseudo-chance chance symbol in the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the split mode is executed and in the case where the stop symbol notice effect in the simultaneous start mode is executed. Can be made different, and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect in the middle display unit and the lower display unit in different ratios depending on whether or not to make a big hit, a random chance symbol design, or a pseudo-continuous chance symbol design. A stop symbol notice effect is newly generated. Therefore, when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the middle display unit and when a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the lower display unit, The expectation for becoming different can be made different, and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect on either one of the middle stage or the lower stage and both the middle stage and the lower stage at different ratios depending on whether or not to make a big hit or a chance of winning chance symbol. A stop symbol notice effect on the display unit is newly generated. Therefore, when the stop symbol notice effect is executed on either one of the middle or lower display units, and when the stop symbol notice effect is executed on both the middle and lower display units, a big hit or a chance to win The expectation for becoming a symbol can be varied, and the interest in games can be improved.

  Even in the case of a pseudo-ream chance symbol, a stop symbol warning pattern that newly generates a stop symbol warning effect is provided on both the middle and lower display portions, and either one of the middle or lower display portions is displayed. The ratio of the pseudo-success chance symbol design may be different between the case where the stop symbol announcement effect is executed and the case where the stop symbol announcement effect is executed on both the middle and lower display units.

  In this embodiment, the case where five winning lines are formed is described as an example where a plurality of winning lines are formed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but a plurality of winning lines are formed. It can also be applied to other gaming machines.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a stop symbol notice effect is executed in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of winning lines. In the example shown in FIG. 66, nine symbols can be displayed simultaneously on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and each symbol is variably displayed in each symbol display area, and the left column L1 and the middle column L2 are displayed. , The right row L3, the upper row L4, the middle row L5, the lower row L6, the upper left to the lower right L7, and the lower left to the upper right L8 are provided in total (see FIG. 66 (1)). . In the example shown in FIG. 66, the effect symbols are variably displayed independently in each symbol display area, and each symbol display area corresponds to a display unit capable of variably displaying the effect symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, a specific example of the effect mode of the stop symbol notice effect when the chance symbol is displayed as a final stop or a temporary stop will be described. When receiving the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the final stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the display result command according to the same process as in step S8002 at the start of variation display. In addition, when a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations is received, a pseudo-continuous chance symbol that is temporarily stopped after the first variation is also determined. In the examples shown in FIGS. 66 (1), (2), (3), and (4), it is assumed that the weak chance symbol symbol is determined to be displayed as a final stop symbol or a temporary stop symbol as a final stop symbol or a temporary stop symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on two display units adjacent vertically in the nine display units (symbol display area) is a weak chance symbol, and adjacent to the vertical and horizontal sides. It is assumed that a state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed on three matching display units is a strong chance symbol.

  Further, according to the same process as in step S8003, the notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display, and whether or not the stop symbol notice effect is executed and the stop symbol notice pattern are determined.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects a process table corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern according to the same processing as in step S8004, and as shown in FIG. On the display screen, the change display of the effect symbol is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), in the upper left symbol display area, the effect symbol 300 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly in accordance with the same processing as in step S8105 while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper left. The stop symbol notice effect is started in such a manner.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 66 (2) and 66 (3), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also lightly displayed in the upper left symbol display area. The design 301 is produced such that the same design 301 as the existing design 300 is split in a red manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), after performing the effect in such a manner that the symbol 300 that is lightly displayed as the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect in such a manner that the same symbol 301 as the symbol 300 is divided is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), the divided and thinly displayed symbol 301 is moved to the left middle symbol display area while the middle left effect symbol is displayed, and the left middle symbol display area is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect at is newly generated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), when it becomes the stop display timing of the effect symbols, the weak chance symbol symbols including the common symbols in the upper left and upper left adjacent to each other are stopped and displayed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 66 (1), (2), (5), and (6), it is assumed that it is determined to display the strong chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol as the final stop symbol or the temporary stop symbol.

  Further, according to the same process as in step S8003, the notice effect setting process is executed at the start of the variable display, and whether or not the stop symbol notice effect is executed and the stop symbol notice pattern are determined.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects a process table corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern according to the same processing as in step S8004, and as shown in FIG. On the display screen, the change display of the effect symbol is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), in the upper left symbol display area, the effect symbol 300 that is finally stopped and displayed is displayed lightly in accordance with the same processing as in step S8105 while displaying the variation of the effect symbol in the upper left. The stop symbol notice effect is started in such a manner.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 66 (2) and 66 (5), while the execution of the stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area continues, the bag is also displayed lightly in the upper left symbol display area. The effect is such that two of the same symbols 301 and 302 as the existing symbol 300 are split in red. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), after performing an effect in such a manner that the symbol 300 that is lightly displayed as a stop symbol notice effect being executed in the upper left symbol display area is lit red, As shown in (), an effect is performed in such a manner that the same symbols 301 and 302 as the symbol 300 are divided into two. Then, while performing the variation display of the middle left and middle effect symbols, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the divided thin display symbol 301 is moved to the left middle symbol display area and the division is performed. The thinly displayed symbol 302 is moved to the middle upper symbol display area, and a stop symbol notice effect is newly generated in the middle left and middle upper symbol display areas.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (6), when it becomes the stop display timing of the effect symbol, the strong chance symbol symbols including the common symbols in the upper left, upper left, and middle adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions are stopped and displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, as an example, the stop symbol notice effect when the weak chance symbol or the strong chance symbol is stopped and displayed is shown, but the stop symbol when the other jackpot symbol or the reach symbol is displayed. Similarly, for the notice effect, the stop symbol notice effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the determined stop symbol notice pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, a reach state is reached when the top and bottom L4, middle L5, bottom L6, top left to bottom right L7, or bottom left to top right L8 winning lines are aligned with the same top and bottom. Furthermore, a big hit is made when the upper, middle and lower parts are displayed in a stopped state with the same pattern. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66, when the left and right winning lines in the left row L1, the middle row L2, or the right row L3 are in a state where the left and right are aligned with the same symbol, the reach state is reached, and the left middle right Even if they are stopped and displayed with the same symbols, they are a big hit. Then, when the stop symbol notice effect is executed in the case of a big win symbol or reach symbol, for example, in the same manner as in FIG. 64, the symbol image in the upper left symbol display area is split and newly lower left or right A stop symbol notice effect may be generated in the lower symbol display area. Also, for example, if the winning line in the left row L1, the middle row L2, or the right row L3 becomes a big hit symbol or a reach symbol, the symbol image in the upper left symbol display area is split and a new upper right symbol display is displayed. A stop symbol notice effect in the area may be generated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, for example, when the symbol in the symbol display area in the upper left is divided into one and a stop symbol warning effect is generated in any of the symbol display areas, a warning effect for notifying that a single reach will be achieved. It becomes. In addition, for example, when the symbol in the upper left symbol display area is split into two and two stop symbol notice effects are newly generated, a notice effect for notifying double reach and a notice effect for notifying triple reach are provided. There is a case. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 66, when one of the symbols divided from the upper left symbol display area is changed to the upper right symbol display area A and the other is moved to the lower right symbol display area C, triple reach A notice effect (an effect for notifying the possibility of reaching at the same time on the winning lines L3, L4, L7), and when the other is moved to the symbol display area B in the middle right, the notice effect on the double reach (the winning lines L3, L3) L4 will give a notice of the possibility of reaching at the same time). In this case, when it is developed into a double reach notice effect, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is developed as a single reach notice effect. In the case of development, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be further increased as compared with the case of development to a double reach notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  The present invention is applicable to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, has a plurality of display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and the identification derived and displayed on each display unit A variable display means for forming a plurality of pay lines based on information, and a player when a combination of identification information derived and displayed in any of the pay lines of the variable display means results in a predetermined specific display result The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine having a specific gaming state advantageous to the above.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (3)

Table radical 113 has a plurality, a game machine for executing the variable display in the variable display means for a plurality of line is formed by the identification information derived displayed on the display unit,
Of the plurality of display units in the variable display means, provided with a notice effect execution means for notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the predetermined display unit before the identification information is derived and displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The notice effect execution means is:
First notice means for notifying the identification information derived and displayed on the first display part by displaying the first image on the first display part among the plurality of display parts;
After the appearance of the second image Te display position smell of the first image, deriving displayed in the second image from the display position is moved to the second display unit different from the first display section the second display unit Second notice means for notifying the identification information to be
Said second warning means, depending on whether moving the second image on any line in the second display section, that display state of the variable display means for warning that a different display state A featured gaming machine. Provided with mode determining means for determining a mode for moving the second image to the second display unit
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The notice effect execution means displays the second image at least on the second display part without moving the second image, thereby giving notice of the identification information derived and displayed on the second display part. Including means
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images